Carel 3413067 300T pRack control PRK30TL3FK User Manual

pRack pR300T
pRack pR300T user manual
for the management of CO2
systems in transcritical
conditions
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
H i g h
E f f i c i e n c y
S o l u t i o n s
ENG
DISPOSAL
IMPORTANT
CAREL bases the development of its products on decades of experience in HVAC, on the continuous investments
in technological innovations to products, procedures and strict quality processes with in-circuit and functional
testing on 100% of its products, and on the most innovative production technology available on the market.
CAREL and its subsidiaries nonetheless cannot guarantee that all the aspects of the product and the software
included with the product respond to the requirements of the final application, despite the product being
developed according to start-of-the-art techniques. The customer (manufacturer, developer or installer of the
final equipment) accepts all liability and risk relating to the configuration of the product in order to reach the
expected results in relation to the specific final installation and/or equipment. CAREL may, based on specific
agreements, act as a consultant for the positive commissioning of the final unit/application, however in no case
does it accept liability for the correct operation of the final equipment/system.
Fig. 1
Fig.2
Please read and keep.
With reference to European Union directive 2012/19/EU issued on 4 July 2012 and related national legislation,
please note that:
1. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) cannot be disposed of as municipal waste but must
be collected separately so as to allow subsequent recycling, treatment or disposal, as required by law;
2. users are required to take Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) at end-of-life, complete with all
essential components, to the WEEE collection centres identified by local authorities. The directive
also provides for the possibility to return the equipment to the distributor or retailer at end-of-life if
purchasing equivalent new equipment, on a one-to-one basis, or one-to-zero for equipment less than
25 cm on their longest side;
3. this equipment may contain hazardous substances: improper use or incorrect disposal of such may have
negative effects on human health and on the environment;
4. the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin – Fig.1) even if, shown on the product or on the packaging,
indicates that the equipment must be disposed of separately at end-of-life;
5. if at end-of-life the EEE contains a battery (Fig. 2), this must be removed following the instructions
provided in the user manual before disposing of the equipment. Used batteries must be taken to
appropriate waste collection centres as required by local regulations;
6. in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties are specified by local waste
disposal legislation.
The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is specified in the technical documentation
supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even prior to purchase, from the website www.CAREL.com.
Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced level of technology, requires setup / configuration /
programming / commissioning to be able to operate in the best possible way for the specific application.
The failure to complete such operations, which are required/indicated in the user manual, may cause the final
product to malfunction; CAREL accepts no liability in such cases.
Only qualified personnel may install or carry out technical service on the product.
The customer must only use the product in the manner described in the documentation relating to the product.
In addition to observing any further warnings described in this manual, the following warnings must be
heeded for all CAREL products:
• Prevent the electronic circuits from getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of liquids or condensate
contain corrosive minerals that may damage the electronic circuits. In any case, the product should be used
or stored in environments that comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the manual.
• Do not install the device in particularly hot environments. Too high temperatures may reduce the life of
electronic devices, damage them and deform or melt the plastic parts. In any case, the product should
be used or stored in environments that comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the
manual.
• Do not attempt to open the device in any way other than described in the manual.
• Do not drop, hit or shake the device, as the internal circuits and mechanisms may be irreparably damaged.
• Do not use corrosive chemicals, solvents or aggressive detergents to clean the device.
• Do not use the product for applications other than those specified in the technical manual.
Warranty on the materials: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding consumables).
Approval: the quality and safety of CAREL INDUSTRIES Hqs products are guaranteed by the ISO 9001 certified
design and production system.
WARNING:
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
All of the above suggestions likewise apply to the controllers, serial boards, programming keys or any other
accessory in the CAREL product portfolio.
CAREL adopts a policy of continual development. Consequently, CAREL reserves the right to make changes and
improvements to any product described in this document without prior warning.
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
separate as much as possible the probe and digital input signal cables from the cables carrying inductive
loads and power cables to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance.
Never run power cables (including the electrical panel wiring) and signal cables in the same conduits.
The technical specifications shown in the manual may be changed without prior warning.
The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is specified in the CAREL general contract conditions, available
on the website www.CAREL.com and/or by specific agreements with customers; specifically, to the extent
where allowed by applicable legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any
lost earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement goods or services, damage to things
or people, downtime or any direct, indirect, incidental, actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential
damage of any kind whatsoever, whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or any other
liabilities deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the product, even if CAREL or its subsidiaries
are warned of the possibility of such damage.
Key icone
to bring attention to a very important subject; in particular, regarding the
practical use of the various functions of the product.
to bring critical issues regarding the use of the pRack PR300 to the attention
IMPORTANT:
of the user.
some simple examples to accompany the user in configuring the most common
TUTORIAL:
settings.
NOTE:
CAREL reserves the right to modify the features of its products without
prior notice.
3
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Content
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
1.2
1.3
6.
Alarm management ...............................................................................................91
Compressor alarms .................................................................................................91
Pressure and prevent alarms .............................................................................92
9.1
9.2
23
94
PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisory systems ............94
Commissioning software ....................................................................................94
10. SOFTWARE UPDATE AND CONFIGURATION
95
10.1 Smart Key: operating instructions .................................................................95
10.2 pRack Manager: operating instructions .....................................................96
10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions ....................................................................97
10.4 Configuring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a system screen ..................101
11. APPENDIX
102
28
Starting the first time .............................................................................................28
Wizard ..............................................................................................................................28
Example of system configuration using the Wizard ...........................28
Advanced configuration ......................................................................................29
5. USER INTERFACE
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
91
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
General installation instructions .....................................................................23
Power supply ..............................................................................................................23
Connecting the analogue inputs ...................................................................23
Connecting the digital inputs ..........................................................................25
Connecting the analogue outputs ...............................................................26
Connecting the digital outputs.......................................................................26
pLAN electrical connections .............................................................................27
4. START UP
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
8.1
8.2
8.3
9
61
Parameter table .........................................................................................................61
Alarm table ...................................................................................................................82
I/O Table .........................................................................................................................85
8. ALARMS
pRack 300 S, M, D, L board description ............................................................... 9
Technical specifications .....................................................................................11
pRack pR300T S, M, D, L board dimensions ............................................16
pRack pR300T general connection diagram...........................................17
Expansion card...........................................................................................................22
3. INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
7.1
7.2
7.3
Main features .................................................................................................................7
Components and accessories .............................................................................7
Configuration of the system and configuration of the inputs ........
and outputs ...................................................................................................................8
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND
INSTALLATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
7. PARAMETERS AND ALARMS TABLE
7
30
Graphic terminal .......................................................................................................30
Description of the display ...................................................................................30
Password ........................................................................................................................31
Menu description .....................................................................................................32
FUNCTIONS
33
6.1 Schematic diagram and system configurations used .......................33
6.2 Unit On-Off...................................................................................................................34
6.3 Control ............................................................................................................................34
6.4 Compressors................................................................................................................36
6.5 Gas cooler .....................................................................................................................40
6.6 HPV valve management ......................................................................................42
6.7 RPRV valve management ....................................................................................44
6.8 Intercooler ....................................................................................................................44
6.9 Energy saving .............................................................................................................45
6.10 Accessory functions................................................................................................46
6.11 Oil management.......................................................................................................46
6.12 Subcooling ...................................................................................................................48
6.13 Heat recovery..............................................................................................................48
6.14 Generic functions .....................................................................................................49
6.15 Double line synchronization (DSS)................................................................51
6.16 EEVS: Electronic Expansion Valve Synchronization .............................52
6.17 Settings...........................................................................................................................55
6.18 Managing the default values ............................................................................55
6.19 Water chiller function ............................................................................................56
6.20 Maximum capacity limit ......................................................................................58
6.21 Valve backup function ..........................................................................................59
6.22 Double line inverter management ...............................................................60
5
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Main features
1.2 Components and accessories
pRack pR300T is the integrated CAREL solution for control and
management of CO2 compressor racks.
The pRack pR300T is available in 4 hardware sizes listed in the table
(for the detailed description of each size, electrical characteristics and
installation, refer to Chapter 2):
The main features and compressor management characteristics of pRack
pR300T are listed below.
1.1.1
Hardware sizes:
Size
Available
analog inputs
Small
Medium
Medium + Driver
Large
5 (*)
8 (*)
8(*) + 4
10 (*)
pR300T functionality list
Possibility of management integrated in a single control for
the medium temperature and low temperature line and the
high pressure stage.
Management of the high pressure valve (HPV)
Management of the receiver pressure regulating valve
(RPRV)
Valves management via external or built-in (PRK30TD*)
driver through fieldbus communication port or via external
driver in position mode in 0…10V
Integration between HPV and receiver pressure
Accessory functions (pre-positioning, minimum and
Main features maximum values differentiated by machine ON and OFF,
maximum distance from the setpoint, ...)
Oil cooler
Oil receiver and oil injection
Heat Reclaim
Integration between heat reclaim and HPV and RPRV valve
management
Double suction line and one high pressure stage
Up to 16 fans for condensing line
Inverter regulation on the first compressor and on the first fan
Generic functions easily configurable (ON/OFF, modulations,
alarms, scheduler)
S, M, D, L version (based on pCO5+ hardware)
Hardware
External display (pGDE) or built-in display
Scroll, reciprocating, digital scroll compressors management
Up to 12 piston compressors per line, a maximum of 4
different sizes
Up to 4 alarms per compressor
Compressors
Inverter management, even with modulation inside the
dead zone
Pump down
Control of overheating in suction
Italian, English, German, French, Spanish, Russian,
Lingue
Portoguese, Swedish
Temperature: °C, °F
Pressure: barg, psig (all pressure values are also converted
Unit of measure to temperature)
Date format settable between: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy,
yy.mm.dd
Proportional band (P, PI) available for compressors and fans
Control
Neutral zone available for compressors and fans
FIFO
Compressor
LIFO
rotation
Timed
Fixed (the ON/OFF order can be set as required)
Scheduling available: heating/cooling, 4 daily time bands,
5 special periods (e.g.: closing period), 10 special days (e.g.:
Scheduling by holidays)
calendar
Schedulable functions: set point compensation for
compressors and fans, split condenser (heating/cooling
only), anti noise, heat recovery, generic functions
Compensation from digital input, from scheduling, floating
Setpoint
based on supervisor parameter (compressors) or outside
temperature (fans)
High pressure, including activation of heat recovery or
Prevent
ChillBooster
Automatic and manual management
Configurable compressor alarms
Alarms
Double Signal on digital outputs for high or low priority
alarms
Log from application
Supervisor
Carel Modbus£
protocol
Tab. 1.a
Available
digital
inputs
8
14
14+2
18
Available
analog
outputs
4
4
4
6
Available
digital
outputs
8
13
13
18
Tab. 1.b
(*) can also be used as digital inputs
For each size the following versions are available:
• with built-in terminal, without terminal
All pRack pR300T models are equipped with:
• integrated RS485 serial interface
• anthracite gray plastic cover
• connector kit
• USB.
pRack pR300T models
Size
Code
PRK30TS0E0
PRK30TS3E0
small
PRK30TS0F0
PRK30TS3F0
PRK30TS3FK
PRK30TM0E0
PRK30TM3E0
medium PRK30TM0F0
PRK30TM3F0
PRK30TM3FK
PRK30TD0E0
PRK30TD3E0
driver
PRK30TD0F0
PRK30TD3F0
PRK30TD3FK
PRK30TL0E0
PRK30TL3E0
large
PRK30TL0F0
PRK30TL3F0
PRK30TL3FK
7
Description
pRack PR300T small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS
OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T small, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS
opto, connector kit
pRack PR300T small, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack PR300T small, USB, external display, BMS/
FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS
OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, USB, no display, BMS/
FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack pR300T medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS opto, kit connettori
pRack pR300T medium, USB, external display,
BMS/FBUS opto, kit connettori
pRack PR300T medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2
UNIV. EXV, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, EVD EVO Eembedded for 2
UNIV. EXV, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2
SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for
2 univ. EXV, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for
2 univ. EXV, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for 2
univ. EXV, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack PR300T large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS
OPTO, 6 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T large, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS opto, 6 SSR, connector kit
pRack PR300T large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS
opto, connector kit
pRack pR300T large, USB, display built-in, BMS/
FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack pR300T large, USB, external display, BMS/
FBUS opto, connector kit
Tab. 1.c
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Example 2: 2 suction lines on the same board with scroll or piston
compressors, 1 high pressure line:
Accessories:
Code
PGDERK1FX0
Description
pGD evolution user terminal for pRack pR300T
Module to convert a 0...10V analog output to an SPDT
CONVONOFF0
digital output
CVSTDUTLF0 USB/RS485 serial convertor with telephone connector
CVSTDUMOR0 USB/RS485 serial converter with 3-way terminal
PCOSO0AKY0 Smart Key programming key
S90CONN002 Connection cable for terminal 1=0.8m
S90CONN000 Connection cable for terminal 1=1.5m
S90CONN001 Connection cable for terminal 1=3 m
SPKT*R* and
Ratiometric pressure probes 0…5 Vdc
SPKC00*
SPK*C*, SPK1*,
Active pressure probes 4…20 mA
SPK2*, SPK3*
NTC*
Pressure probe NTC -50T90°C
NTC*HT*
Pressure probe NTC -0T150°C
EVD0000E50
EVD EVO universal driver for Carel valves, RS485/ModbusTM
EVDIS00D*0
Display for EVD EVO
E2VCABS*00
EVD-valve connection cable
Tab. 1.d
I/O
pR300T
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. 1.b
Example 3: 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston
compressors), 1 high pressure line (on the first suction line board):
1.3 Configuration of the system and
configuration of the inputs and outputs
I/O
3
2
C8
C7
C7
2
NC8
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
C4
3
J15
1
BMS card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
Y3
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
J1
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
+5 VREF
B M S car d
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
GND
J2
J14
4
J26 FBus2
pR300T
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
J13
J25 BMS2
I/O
I/O
System configurations available
pRack pR300T can manage system configurations with up to 2 suction
lines (maximum 12 scroll or piston compressors for lines 1 and 2) and up
to 1 high pressure line (maximum 16 fans per line). When there are two
suction lines, the lines can be managed by the same pRack board or by
separate boards. The condenser line can be managed by the board that
manages the suction line, or by a separate board, in accordance with the
number of inputs/outputs available.
Fig. 1.c
Example 4: 2 suction lines on separate boards with scroll or piston
compressors, 1 high pressure line on separate board:
For each line, both suction and condensing, pRack pR300T can manage
a modulating device (inverter, Digital Scroll® compressor or compressor
with continuous control).
3
2
NC8
C8
C7
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
J13
J10
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300T
pR300
BMS card
ID7
ID8
IDC1
NC8
ID6
C8
ID5
NO8
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
J5
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+Vterm
GND
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
Y2
pLAN
U3
Example 1: 1 suction line with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high pressure
line:
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
I/O
NO1
1.3.1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300T
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
NO1
C8
C7
C7
J14
4
NC8
C4
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
C1
Note: each input/output is completely configurable with the only
requirements being those set by the system configuration. For
example, the suction pressure probe on line 1 can be arbitrarily configured
to any one of the analog inputs in the pLAN control board with address 1
compatible with the type of probe.
NO2
pLAN
NO1
pRack pR300T has the same system configuration management and
input and output configuration management as the standard pRack.
C8
2
J12
J11 pLAN
J13
4
3
2
NC8
C8
C7
J15
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
C1
J15
1
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
pR300T
pR300
pR300T
BMS card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
Y3
ID3
ID2
ID1
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
J5
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
B M S car d
J4
J3
GND
U3
J2
U2
J24
U1
G
J26 FBus2
G0
J1
+5 VREF
1
+Vterm
2
GND
J25 BMS2
3
3
J26 FBus2
J15
FieldBus card
4
Y2
C7
J14
NC8
C7
J13
NO8
C4
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
J12
C7
J14
4
J25 BMS2
J11 pLAN
C7
J13
J10
J10
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
I/O
NO1
pLAN
J12
J11 pLAN
pR300T
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
I/O
I/O
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
Fig. 1.d
I/O
Note: if connecting more than one pRack pR300 board in a pLAN,
mixed networks cannot be created combining Compact boards and S, M,
L boards, while mixed networks are possible using combinations of the
latter models only.
Fig. 1.a
Important: all the boards connected to the pLAN must have the
same software revision.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
8
ENG
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION
2.1 pRack 300 S, M, D, L board description
pRack pR300T S
14
C8
J15
J14
J13
J10
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
16
17
3
2
NC8
ID8
NO11
C7
NO8
ID7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO10
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
NO3
C1
15
NO2
13
12
11
NO1
10
1
18
pR300T
1
3
5
IDC1
8
7
6
ID6
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
+VDC
U4
3
4
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U1
2
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G
G0
+Vterm
J1
B M S card
ID5
FieldBus card
Fig. 2.a
pRack pR300T M
J10
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
16
17
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
C8
C9
J17
J16
J15
J14
J13
NC8
NO8
C7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
NO9
15
14
C1
13
NO2
12
11
NO1
10
J18
1
18
pR300T
1
2
3
B M S card
3
5
6
7
3
8
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID10
GND
ID9
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
8
ID11
J7
J6
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
9
Fig. 2.b
Key:
Ref. Description
1
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal+5 VREF power supply
2
for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
Ref. Description
11 pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Tab. 2.a
9
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
pRack pR300T D
14
J25 BMS2
J26FBus2
16
17
4
21
24
NC13
4
23
3
ID13
IDC13
DI2
S2
S3
ID13H
DI1
S1
IDC9
ID14H
VREF
ID9
GND
J7
S4
GND
ID12
G
G0
8
U8
U7
J6
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID11
C D
A B
ID14
J29
ID10
VBAT
7
6
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
5
3
C13
20
J5
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
3
2
J28
J30
B M S card
J3
U3
U1
2
1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J24
3
1
J27
18
22
J1
NO13
C12
NC12
C9
NO12
NO11
C9
NO9
NO10
C8
1
pR300T
FieldBus card
J18
J17
4
2
2
3
1
4
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
J10
J16
J15
J14
J13
3
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
C1
15
NO3
13
12
NO2
11
NO1
10
J8
9
8
Fig. 2.c
Key:
Ref.
1
Description
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
11
pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Ref.
13
Description
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
16
17
Relay digital outputs
BMS2 connector
FieldBus2 connector
18
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
20
21
22
23
24
Electronic valve A connector
Electronic valve B connector
Connector for external Ultracap module (accessory)
Valve driver analogue and digital inputs
Valve status signal LED
Tab. 2.b
N.C. Model
J18
C16
NO17
NO18
NO16
C16
C13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
NO9
C9
C8
NC8
NC15
1
C15
2
C14
3
NC14
4
J17
J16
NO15
C7
NO8
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
J10
J25 BMS2
J15
J14
J13
NO14
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
J22
J21
J22
J23 FBus2
15
15
19
J26 FBus2
NC13
15
C16
14
NC17
13
12
NC18
11
C16
10
NC16
pRack pR300T L
16
17
18
9
3
7
8
pR300T
1
2
3
3
6
U10
GND
ID17
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC17
GND
ID13
ID18
U9
ID13H
Y6
Y5
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15H
ID15
8
3
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
ID9
U8
J6
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
7
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
5
J20
J5
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
J19
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
8
J8
9
Fig. 2.d
Key:
Ref. Description
1
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Ref.
11
Description
pLAN plug-in connector
12, 13, 14
Reserved
15
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
19
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
FieldBus2 connector
Tab. 2.c
10
ENG
2.2 Technical specifications
2.2.1
Physical specifications
Dimensions
Plastic case
Built-in terminal
SMALL
MEDIUM, LARGE
BUILT-IN DRIVER
Assembly
Material
Flammability
Ball pressure test
Resistance to creeping current
Colour
PGDE (132x64 pixel) with backlit keypad
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Ingress protection
Other features
Environmental pollution
Class according to protection against electric shock
PTI of the insulating materials
Period of stress across the insulating parts
Type of action
Type of disconnection or microswitching
Heat and fire resistance category
Ageing characteristics (operating hours)
Number of automatic operating cycles
Overvoltage category
2.2.2
13 DIN modules 110 X 227,5 X 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 X 315 X 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 X 315 X 75 mm
fitted on DIN rail in accordance with DIN 43880 CEI EN 50022
technopolymer
V2 (UL94) and 850 °C (in accordance with IEC 60695)
125 °C
≥ 250 V
Antrancite
PRK300T*3**, PRK300T*0**(w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH noncondensing(*)
PRK300T*3*0 (with built-in terminal): -20T60 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
(*) with Ultracap module fitted: -40T60°C
PRK300TD*** (w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
PRK300TD*** (with built-in terminal): -30T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
Models with USB port and/or with Ultracap module: IP20 on the front panel only
Models without USB port and without Ultracap module: IP40 on the front panel
only
2
to be integrated into Class I and/or II appliances in the versions without valve
driver, class I in the versions with valve driver
PCB: PTI 250 V; insulating material: PTI 175
long
1C; 1Y for SSR versions
microswitching
Category D (UL94-V2)
80,000
100,000 (EN 60730-1); 30,000 (UL 873)
category II
Tab. 2.d
Electrical specifications
Power supply
SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE: use a dedicated 50 class II safety transformer VA.
BUILT IN DRIVER: use a dedicated 100 VA class II safety transformer.
Vac
P (Vac)
Vdc
SMALL
24 Vac (+10/45 VA
28 to 36 Vdc
MEDIUM
15%), 50/60 Hz
(-20/+10%)
LARGE
protected by an
protected by an
external 2.5 A
external 2.5 A type
type T fuse
T fuse
BUILT-IN DRIVER
90 VA
P (Vdc)
30 W
Not allowed
Important: only power “PRK300TD***” with alternating current. The power transformer secondary must be earthed.
Terminal block
with male/female plug-in connectors
Cable cross-section
min 0.5 mm2 - max 2.5 mm2
CPU
32 bit, 100 MHz
Non-volatile memory (FLASH) 2 M byte Bios + 11 Mbyte application program
Data memory (RAM)
3.2 Mbyte (1.76 Mbyte Bios + 1.44 Mbyte application program)
T buffer memory (EEPROM)
13 kbyte
P parameter
32 kbyte (not available to the pLAN)
memory(EEPROM)
Clock with battery
standard, precision 100 ppm
Battery
CR2430 3 Vdc lithium button battery (size 24x3 mm)
Software class and structure Class A
Category of immunity to
Category III
voltage surges (EN 61000-4-5)
Device not designed to be hand-held when powered
Tab. 2.e
11
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Universal inputs/outputs U...
4 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8, 1 on U9...U10)
6
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs from probes powered by the
controller
- 0 to 5 V signals from ratiometric probes powered by controller
Input precision: ± 0.3 % f.s.
Time constant for each input: 0.5 s
Classification of measuring circuits (CEI EN 61010-1): category I
Digital inputs w/o optical isolation,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
- voltage-free contacts
- fast digital inputs
type: voltage-free contact
max current: 10 mA
max frequency 2kHz and resolution ±1 Hz
5
4
max tot 4
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs powered externally
5
3 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8)
6
5
4
8
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
7
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
6
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
DRIVER
5
8
max 2 4
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8)
max tot 10
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals powered externally
2
10
10
max tot 9
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals from probes powered by controller
LARGE
max tot 8
- CAREL NTC probes (-50T90°C; R/T 10 kΩ±1% at 25°C);
- HT NTC (0T150°C); - PTC (600Ω to 2200Ω)
- PT500 (-100T400°C) - PT1000 (-100T400°C)
- PT100 probes (-100T200°C)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
DRIVER
5
8
max tot 7
Analogue inputs,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
max tot 5
2.2.3
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
9
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
6
LARGE
10
6
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
Important:
• for active probes powered externally (0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA ), to avoid irreparably damaging the controller, implement adequate current
protection measures that must ensure < 100 mA;
• the ratiometric probes can only be powered by the controller;
• on power-up, the universal inputs/outputs remain shorted to GND for around 500 ms until the end of the configuration procedure.
Analogue outputs w/o optical
isolation (maximum number),
Lmax = 30 m
0 to 10 Vdc (maximum current 2 mA)
PWM (output 0/3.3 Vdc, maximum current 2 mA, frequency:
2kHz asynchronous)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
DRIVER
5
8
5
8
LARGE
10
10
Tab. 2.f
2.2.4
Power supply to probes and terminals
can be used to power any active probes using the 24/21 Vdc ± 10% (P+5*/P+3*) available at terminal +VDC (J2). The maximum current
available is 150 mA, protected against short-circuits.
+5Vref
to power the 0 to 5V ratiometric probes, use the 5 Vdc (± 5%) available at terminal +5VREF(J24). The maximum current available is 60 mA.
P+3**********: 21 Vdc ± 10%; P+5**********: 24 Vdc ± 10%
Vterm
Used to power an external terminal as an alternative to the one connected to J10, Pmax = 1.5 W
Important: if the length exceeds 10 m, use shielded cable with the shield connected to earth. In any case, the max length allowed is 30 m.
Tab. 2.g
+Vdc
2.2.5
Digital inputs ID... IDH...
Type
Lmax
Optically-isolated
30 m
SMALL
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
LARGE
Minimum digital input pulse Normally open (open-closed-open)
Normally closed (closed-open-closed)
detection time
Maximum number
Power supply to the inputs External
Classification of measuring Category I: 24 Vac/Vdc (J5, J7, J20)
circuits (CEI EN 61010-1)
Category III: 230 Vac (J8, J19)
Digital input current draw at 24 Vac/Vdc
Digital input current draw at 230 Vac
no. of optically-isolated no. of optically-isolated inputs, 24 Vac/Vdc or 230 Vac inputs, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc 50/60 Hz
8
None
12
2
14
4
200 ms
400 ms
IDH...: 230 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz
5 mA
5 mA
Tab. 2.h
Note:
• separate as much as possible the probe and digital input cables from cables to inductive loads and power cables, so as to avoid possible electromagnetic
disturbance. Never run power cables (including the electrical panel cables) and signal cables in the same conduits;
• the two 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc inputs on terminals J8 (ID13, ID14) or J19 (ID15, ID16) have the same common pole and therefore both will operate at
230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc. There is basic insulation between the two inputs; there is reinforced insulation between the inputs and the rest of the controller;
• ID1...ID8, ID9 to ID12, ID17, ID18 have functional insulation from the rest of the controller;
• for DC voltage inputs (24 Vdc) either the + or the - can be connected to common terminal;
• the rating of the external contact connected to the digital inputs must be at least 5 mA.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
12
ENG
2.2.6
Analogue outputs Y...
Type
Lmax
Maximum number
Power supply
Precision
Resolution
Settling time
Maximum load
0 to 10 V optically-isolated on Y1...Y6
30 m
SMALL, MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
LARGE
external
Y1...Y6
8 bit
Y1...Y6
1 kΩ (10 mA)
4
Y1...Y4, 0 to 10 V
6
Y1...Y6, 0 to 10 V
24 Vac (+10/-15%) or 28 to 36 Vdc on VG(+), VG0(-)
± 2% full scale
from 1 s (slew rate 10 V/s) to 20 s (slew rate 0.5 V/s) selectable via SW
Tab. 2.i
Warnings:
• for lengths > 10 m, only use shielded cable, with the shield connected to earth;
• a 0 to 10 Vdc analogue output can be connected in parallel to other outputs of the same type, or alternatively to an external source of voltage. The higher
voltage will be considered. Correct operation is not guaranteed if actuators with voltage inputs are connected;
• power the VG-VG0 analogue outputs at the same voltage on G-G0: Connect G0 to VG0 and G to VG. This is valid for both alternating and direct current
power supplies.
2.2.7
Digital outputs NO..., NC...
Type
Maximum no
Relay. Minimum contact current: 50 mA.
8: SMALL; 13: MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER; 18: LARGE;
The relay outputs have different features depending on the model of controller. The outputs can be divided into groups. The relays belonging
to the same group (individual cell in the table) have basic insulation and therefore must have the same voltage. Between groups (cells in the
Insulation distance
table) there is double insulation and consequently these may have different voltages. There is also double insulation between each terminal of
the digital outputs and the rest of the controller.
Relays with the same insulation
Makeup of the
groups
Number of
changeover
contacts
Model
1
SMALL
1-3
Type of relay
Type A
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
1-3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NO
1-3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NC
1-3
Type of relay
Type A
EXTRALARGE
1-3
Type of relay
Type A
1: SMALL (relay 8)
3: MEDIUM (relay 8, 12, 13)
5: LARGE NO/NC (relay 8, 12, 13, 14 e 15)
2
3
4
5
Group
6
4-6
Type A
4-6
Type A
4-6
Type A
4-6
Type A
4-6
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
9-11
Type A
9-11
Type A
9-11
Type A
9-11
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
7
13
Type A
13
Type A
13
Type A
13
Type A
8
14-15
Type A
14-15
Type A
14-16
Type B
9
16-18
Type A
16-18
Type C
17-20
Type B
10
21-24
Type B
11
25-29
Type B
Note: the output relays have different features, depending on the model of controller.
Rated data
Relay type A
Approval
Relay rated data
Switchable power Relay type B
Approval
Relay rated data
Relay type C
Approval
SPDT, 2000 VA, 250 Vac, 8A resistive
UL 873
2 A 250 Vac resistive, 2A FLA, 12 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
2 A resistive, 2A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 2(2)A (100,000 cycles)
SPST, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
SPDT, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
Tab. 2.j
2.2.8
SSR outputs (in models where featured)
Maximum number
Working voltage
Load current (MAX)
Impulsive load current (MAX)
2: SMALL (outputs 7, 8);
2: MEDIUM (outputs 7, 12);
6: LARGE (outputs 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15)
24 Vac/Vdc
1A
1.2 A
Tab. 2.k
Warnings:
• if the load requires higher current, use an external SSR;
• to power external loads, use the same power supply as the pCO (connected to terminals G/G0); this must always be dedicated and not in common with the power
supply to other devices on the electrical panel (such as contactors, coils, etc...);
• the groups that the digital outputs are divided into have two common pole terminals to simplify wiring;
• make sure that the current running through the common terminals does not exceed the rated current of an individual terminal, that is, 8 A.
13
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
2.2.9
Serial port
Use AWG 20-22 twisted pair shielded cable for the +/-
Use AWG20/22 shielded three-wire cable (one twisted pair plus a third wire) with a capacitance between the wires of less than 90 pF/m (example: BELDEN
3106A). The shield must be connected to earth and not to the GND terminals. Alternatively, use AWG20/22 shielded twisted pair cable with a capacitance
between the wires of less than 90 pF/m (example: BELDEN 8761); use the shield to connect the GND terminals, without connecting it to earth. The
maximum length of the serial network is 500 m with AWG22 cable, 1000 m with AWG20 cable.
Serial
Serial ZERO
Serial ONE
Serial TWO
Serial THREE
Serial FOUR
Type/connectors
pLAN/J10, J11
Features
• Integrated on main board
• HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 pLAN
• Not optically-isolated
• Connectors: 6-pin telephone jack + 3-pin plug-in p. 5.08
• Maximum length: 500 m
• Max data rate: 115200 bit/s
• Maximum number of connectable devices: 3
BMS 1 Serial Card
• Not integrated on main board
• HW driver: not featured
• Can be used with all pCO family optional BMS cards
FieldBus 1 Serial Card • Not integrated on main board
• HW driver: not present
• Can be used with all pCO family optional FieldBus cards
BMS 2 / J25
• Integrated on main board
• HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 Slave
• Optically-isolated
• 3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
• Maximum length: 1000 m
• Max data rate: 384000 bit/s
FFieldBus 2 / J26 (and • Integrated on main board
J23 on Large and
• J23: not optically-isolated
Extralarge version)
• J26: optically-isolated
• 3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
• J23 and J26 are independent.
Tab. 2.l
Note: in industrial/residential environments, for distances > 10 m, shielded cable is required, with the shield connected to earth. In residential environments (EN
55014), irrespective of the cable length, on versions without valve driver, the connection cable between the controller and the terminal and the serial cable must be
shielded and connected to earth at both ends.
2.2.10 Model with electronic expansion valve driver
Valve compatibility
Motor connection
Digital input
connection
CAREL: E*V****
ALCO: EX4; EX5; EX6; EX7; EX8 330 Hz (recommended by CAREL); EX8 500 Hz (from ALCO specifications)
SPORLAN: SEI 0.5-11; SER 1.5-20; SEI 30; SEI 50; SEH 100; SEH175
Danfoss: ETS 12.5-25B; ETS 50B; ETS 100B; ETS 250; ETS 400 CCM 40, CCM 10-20-30, CCMT 2-4-8
CAREL: two CAREL EXV as for EVD EVOLUTION TWIN
SPORLAN: SER(I) G, J, K
Shielded 4-wire cable CAREL P/N E2VCABS*00, or AWG22 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax =10 m,
or AWG14 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax 50 m
Digital input to be activated with voltage-free contact or transistor to GND.
Closing current 5mA; maximum length < 10 m
Maximum length 10 m or less than 30 m with shielded cable
S1 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S2 low temperature NTC
Probes
Power to active
probes (VREF)
Emergency power
supply
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 °C, -50T90 °C
high temperature NTC
50 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C
combined NTC
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T120 °C
0 to 10 V input (max 12 V)
S3 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V):
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S4 low temperature NTC
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-50T105 °C
high temperature NTC
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C
combined NTC
10 kΩ at 25 °C, -40T120 °C
measurement error: 2% fs massimo; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs massimo; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs massimo; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs massimo; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1°C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range
+50T90 °C
measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115°C, 4 °C in range
outside of -20T115 °C
measurement error: 1°C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range
+50T90 °C
measurement error: 9% fs massimo; 8% typical
measurement error: 2% fs massimo; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs massimo; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs massimo; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs massimo; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1 °C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range
50T90 °C
measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115 °C; 4 °C in range
outside of -20T115 °C
measurement error 1 °C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range
+50T90 °C
programmable output: +5 Vdc ±2% or 12 Vdc ±10%, Imax = 50 mA
optional Ultracapacitor module (PCOS00UC20 or EVD0000UC0). If the controller operates constantly at temperatures near the upper limit of
60°C it’s recommended to use the external module EVD0000UC0, where possible located in the coolest point of the panel. The PCOS00UC20
and EVD0000UC0 modules can be connected at the same time to the same controller, thus doubling the energy available to close the valves.
Important: The module only powers the valve driver and not the controller.
Tab. 2.m
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
14
ENG
2.2.11 Meaning of the inputs/outputs on the pRack pR300T S, M, L boards
Version
S, M, L
M, L
S, M, L
M, L
L
Connector
J1-1
J1-2
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J4-1
J4-2
J4-3
J4-4
J4-5
J4-6
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J9
J10
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J15-1
J15-2
J15-3
J16-1
J16-2
J16-3
J16-4
J16-5
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J18-1
J18-2
J18-3
J19-1
J19-2
J19-3
J19-4
J19-5
J20-1
J20-2
J20-3
J20-4
J20-5
Signal
G
G0
B1
B2
B3
GND
+VDC
B4
BC4
B5
BC5
VG
VG0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
IDC1
B6
B7
B8
GND
ID9
ID10
ID11
ID12
IDC9
ID13H
ID13
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
RX-/TXRX+/TX+
GND
C1
NO1
NO2
NO3
C1
C4
NO4
NO5
NO6
C4
C7
NO7
C7
NO8
C8
NC8/--C9
NO9
NO10
NO11
C9
NO12
C12
NC12/--NO13
C13
NC13
ID15H
ID15
IDC15
ID16
ID16H
Y5
Y6
B9
BC9
B10
Description
+24 Vdc or 24 Vac power supply
power supply reference
universal analogue input 1 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 2 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 3 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
21 Vdc power supply for active probes (maximum current 200 mA)
passive analogue input 4 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 4
passive analogue input 5 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 5
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 24 Vac/Vdc
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
analogue output no. 1, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 2, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 3, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 4, 0…10 V
digital input no. 1, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 2, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 3, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 4, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 5, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 6, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 7, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 8, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 1 to 8 (negative pole for DC power supply)
universal analogue input 6 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 7 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 8 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
digital input no. 9, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 10, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 11, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 12, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 9 to 12 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 13, 230 Vac
digital input no. 13, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 13 and 14 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 14, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 14, 230 Vac
8-pin telephone connector for connecting a display terminal (not used)
6-pin telephone connector for connecting the standard pGDE user terminal
RX-/TX- connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
RX+/TX+ connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
GND connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
normally open contact, relay no. 1
normally open contact, relay no. 2
normally open contact, relay no. 3
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
normally open contact, relay no. 4
normally open contact, relay no. 5
normally open contact, relay no. 6
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 7/ normally open contact, relay no. 7 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 8/ only S-board: normally open contact, relay no. 8 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc, S board only (*)
common for relay no. 8
normally closed contact relay no. 8/ only S-board: not used, S board only (*)
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 9
normally open contact, relay no. 10
normally open contact, relay no. 11
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 12/ normally open contact, relay no. 12 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 12
normally closed contact relay no. 12/ not used (*)
normally open contact, relay no. 13
common for relay no. 13
normally closed contact relay no. 13
digital input no. 15, 230 Vac
digital input no. 15, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 15 and 16 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 16, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 16, 230 Vac
digital input no. 5 0…10 V
digital input no. 6 0…10 V
passive analogue input 9 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 9
passive analogue input 10 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
15
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Version
Connector
J20-6
J20-7
J20-8
J20-9
J21-1
J21-2
J21-3
J21-4
J21-5
L
J21-6
J22-1
J22-2
J22-3
J22-4
J22-5
J23-1
J23-2
J23-3
J24-1
J24-2
J24-3
J25-1
S, M, D, L J25-2
J25-3
J26-1
J26-2
J26-3
J27-1
J27-2
J27-3
J27-4
J28-1
J28-2
J28-3
J28-4
J29-1
J29-2
D
J29-3
J29-4
J29-5
J29-6
J29-7
J29-8
J30-1
J30-2
J30-3
(*) depending on model
Signal
BC10
ID17
ID18
IDC17
NO14
C14
NC14/--NO15
C15
NC15/--C16
NO16
NO17
NO18
C16
EE+
GND
+V term
GND
+5 Vref
EE+
GND
EE+
GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
GND
VREF
S1
S2
S3
S4
DI1
DI2
VBAT
G0
G
Description
common for analogue input 10
digital input no. 17, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 18, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 17 and 18 (negative pole for DC power supply)
normally open contact, relay no. 14/ normally open contact, relay no. 14 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 14
normally closed contact relay no. 14/ not used (*)
normally open contact, relay no. 15/ normally open contact, relay no. 15 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 15
normally closed contact relay no. 15/ not used (*)
common for relay: no. 16, 17, 18
normally open contact, relay no. 16
normally open contact, relay no. 17
normally open contact, relay no.18
common for relay: no. 16, 17, 18
E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
additional power supply terminal Aria (not used)
power supply common
power supply for 0/5 V ratiometric probes
E- terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2
E+ terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2
GND terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2
E- terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2
E+ terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2
GND terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
ExV connection, power stepper-motor
Signals-ground
Active probe power supply
Probe 1 (pressure) or external-signal 4…20mA
Probe 2 (temperature) or external-signal 0…10V
Probe 3 (pressure) or external-signal 4…20mA
Probe 4 (temperature)
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Emergency power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Tab. 2.n
2.3 pRack pR300T S, M, D, L board
dimensions
45
110
44
pR300T
pR300
B
A
Fig. 2.e
A
B
B - with USB port
and/or built-in
terminal
B - with Ultracap
module
Small
227,5
60
70
Medium
315
60
70
Buit-in driver
315
60
70
Large
315
60
70
-
-
75
-
Tab. 2.o
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
16
ENG
2.4 pRack pR300T general connection diagram
Small
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J10
4
3
2
Bianco
IDC1
C8
GND
U5
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
U2
Bianco
Verde
ID
GND
ID8
ID7
Sonda 4-20 mA:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Nero
-
GND
+
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
U4
+VDC
GND
Sonda raziometrica:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
J5
Y2
J4
J2
NC8
C7
1
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U1
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J15
J26 FBus2
pR300
pR300T
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
C1
NO2
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
Nero
( *)
(max 6 sonde attive)
Ingressi universali
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5
Verde
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
ID
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
OUT 4
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
AO/DO
24 Vac/ Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
Fig. 2.f
17
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Medium
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J10
4
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
C8
NO9
Bianco
Verde
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
ID
GND
U3
U2
Sonda 4-20 mA:
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
ID9
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J6
U1
GND
U3
U2
Nero Bianco
-
GND
+
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J7
Sonda raziometrica:
U1
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
J5
Nero
Verde
(*)
(max 6 sonde attive)
Ingressi universali
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8
RS485
BMS connections
J4
J2
NC8
C7
1
+VDC
Ntc/Pt1000
J18
J26 FBus2
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J17
J16
J15
pR300
pR300T
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
ID
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
Fig. 2.g
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
18
24 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
ENG
Large
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
C9
C16
NO18
NO17
NO16
U10
GND
ID17
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC17
GND
ID18
U9
ID13
Y6
ID13H
Y5
ID16H
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
Bianco
White
Verde
J8
ID
GND
U4
U5
J3
+VDC
GND
U1
U3
Sonda 4-20 mA:
GND
ID9
GND
U8
J6
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
NO12
NO
NO11
NO1
10
C9
C8
NO9
C16
NC15
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
J20
U2
GND
-
GND
+
Bianco
U3
U1
U2
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
Nero
J19
J5
Sonda raziometrica:
J2
U1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
J4
J3
+VDC
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J2
J18
J23 FBus2
J22
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
Black
Nero
Green
Verde
(*)
(max 6 sonde attive)
Ingressi universali
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8-U9-U10
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
J24
NC8
J21
J26 FBus2
pR300
pR300T
FieldBus card
J17
J16
C15
C7
1
NC14
2
J15
NO15
3
C14
4
NO14
J10
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
ID
24 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
IDC17
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
GND
U9
Y6
Y5
J20
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
IDC17
ID17
ID18
GND
U10
GND
U9
Y6
Y5
J20
OUT 5
OUT 6
AO/DO
0 Vac/Vdc
Fig. 2.h
19
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Driver integrato
CAREL ExV valve A
pGDE pRack
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
CAREL ExV valve B
shield
3
2
C13
NC1
13
NO1
13
C12
NC1
12
C9
NO12
NO11
10
NO1
C9
NO9
C8
NC8
C7
ID14H
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
ID
Bianco
Verde
DI2
DI1
ID14
IDC13
ID13
IDC9
ID13H
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J6
S4
S2
S3
S1
VREF
GND
G
VBAT
G0
GND
+
-
C D
A B
Sonda 4-20 mA:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Bianco
J29
J30
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Nero
J28
J5
Sonda raziometrica:
J2
Nero
Verde
(*)
(max 6 sonde attive)
Ingressi universali
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Ntc/Pt1000
J27
1
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
J24
J1
18
J26 FBus2
pR300
pR300T
FieldBus card
J17
J16
1
3
2
4
4
J15
1
3
2
4
J10
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
shield
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
Connessioni ad altri tipi di valvole
2
4
5
3
4
COMA
NOA
Legenda:
6
1
4
1 verde
2 marrone
3 bianco
4 rosso
2
3
3
5
5
5 nero
6 blu
Fig. 2.i
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
20
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
1
1
3
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
NTC driver A
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
DI2
DI1
S4
S2
S3
S1
VREF
GND
J29
ENG
Driver esterno (applicabile a S/M/L/D)
3
2
ID8
IDC1
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
J5
Y2
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
RS485
BMS connections
24 Vac
35 VA
TRADRFE240
(dedicato)
shield
4
indirizzo seriale 198
2
NOA
3
COMA
1
DI1
DI2
G
G0
VBAT
G0
VBAT
G
2 AT
S4
230 Vac
NC8
C7
1
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J24
C8
4
J15
J26 FBus2
pR300
pR300T
J1
-
J10
FieldBus card
NO8
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
GND
+
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
S2
S3
S1
VREF
GND
Ultracap Technology
GND Tx/Rx
Connessioni ad altri tipi di valvole
1
1
3
2
4
COMA
NOA
Legenda:
1 verde
2 marrone
4
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
1
5
3
3 bianco
4 rosso
4
6
3
5
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
2
3
5
NTC driver A
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
5 nero
6 blu
Fig. 2.j
21
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Additional configuration of the expansion card is possible on Fda01,
under PROGRAMMINGÆ F.Settings Æd.FIELDBUS:
2.5 Expansion card
From version 3.3.0, an I/O expansion card can be used to provide additional
analogue and digital channels, ideal when there is a high number of
compressors and corresponding alarms, or with complex heat recovery
systems that require of numerous temperature sensors in the water and
CO2 circuits (see technical leaflet +0500059IE for the product’s electrical
and physical specifications). The universal inputs/outputs (marked U on
the connection diagram) can be configured by pRack pR300T to connect
active and passive probes, digital inputs, analogue and PWM outputs, up
to a total of 10. A further 6 digital outputs are also available.
8
Address
7
6
When enabling “Offline pattern”, the status of the outputs can be
configured if the card is offline from the pRack.
Both the digital (Fda01) that analogue outputs (Fda02) can be configured
5
Ext Baud Prot
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19.2 K
9.6 K
38.4 K
57.6 K
with offset
no offset
CAREL
Modbus
ON
OFF
Address
Notice: Carel does not recommend using the expansion card for
configuring control probes (suction pressure probes, including backup
probes), modulation signals for the inverters, serious alarm signals and
pressure switches.
Ext. Baud Prot
3
1
The expansion card is connected to the pRack pR300T via port J26 FBus
on the pRack, the same used for connecting an external driver, and port
J6BMS on the expansion card via RS485
2
Fig. 2.k
Key:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Power connector [G(+), G0(-), Vbat]
Universal inputs/outputs
+Vdc power supply for active probes
+5V power supply for ratiometric probes
Relay digital outputs
BMS connector
Communication indicator LED
Configuration indicator LED
Configuration dipswitches
Fig. 2.m
For correct communication with pRack pR300T, the dipswitches on the
expansion card should be configured as follows:
• Address: 15
• Ext: no off set
• Baud: 19.2 K
• Prot: CAREL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
with offset
no offset
19.2 K
9.6 K
38.4 K
57.6 K
Only one expansion card can be used for each compressor rack and the
expansion card can only be connected to the board with pLAN address 1:
CAREL
Modbus
ON
OFF
Address
Ext. Baud Prot
Fig. 2.l
Fig. 2.n
The pRack pR300T software (version 3.3.0 and higher) offers the possibility
to extend the number of I/Os by expansion card directly from the Wizard,
in screen Ib1f:
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
22
ENG
3.
INSTALLATION
3.1 General installation instructions
• all the very low voltage connections (analogue and 24 Vac/Vdc digital
3.1.1
•
Installation procedure
Environmental conditions
•
Avoid assembling the pRack PR300T and the terminal in environments with
the following characteristics:
• temperature and humidity that do not conform to the rated operating
data of the product;
•
• strong vibrations or knocks;
• exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheres(e.g.: sulphur and
•
•
•
•
•
•
ammonia fumes, saline mist, smoke) so as to avoid corrosion and/or
oxidation;
strong magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (therefore avoid
installing the units near transmitting antennae);
exposure of the pRack PR300T to direct sunlight and to the elements
in general;
large and rapid fluctuations in the room temperature;
environments containing explosives or mixes of flammable gases;
exposure to dust (formation of corrosive patina with possible oxidation
and reduction of insulation).
inputs, analogue outputs, serial bus connections, power supplies)
must have reinforced or double insulation from the mains network;
in residential environments, the connection cable between the pRack
PR300T and the terminal must be shielded;
there is no limit to the number of cables that can be connected to an
individual terminal. The only limitation concerns the maximum current
crossing each terminal: this must not exceed 8 A;
the maximum cross-section of the cable that connected to a terminal
is 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG);
the maximum value of the twisting torque to tighten the screw on the
terminal (torque tightening) is 0.6 Nm;
Important:
• Installation must be performed according to the standards and
legislation in force in the country where the device is used;
• for safety reasons the equipment must be housed inside an electrical
panel, so that the only accessible part is the display and the keypad;
• in the event of malfunctions, do not attempt to repair the device, but
rather contact the CAREL service centre;
• the connector kit also contains the stick-on labels.
Positioning the instrument inside the panel
The position of the instrument in the electrical cabinet must be chosen
so as to guarantee correct physical separation of the instrument from
the power components (solenoids, contactors, actuators, inverters, …)
and the connected cables. Proximity to such devices/cables may create
random malfunctions that are not immediately evident.
3.1.3
The structure of the panel must allow the correct flow of cooling air.
3.1.2
Wiring procedure
When laying the wiring, “physically “ separate the power part from the
control part. The proximity of these two sets of wires will, in most cases,
cause problems of induced disturbance or, over time, malfunctions or
damage to the components. The ideal solution is to house these two
circuits in two separate cabinets. Sometimes this is not possible, and
therefore the power part and the control part must be installed inside the
same panel. For the control Signals, it is recommended to use shielded
cables with twisted wires.
3.2 Power supply
28…36 Vdc +10/-20% or24 Vac +10/-15% 50…60 Hz;
Power supply to
the pRack PR300T
S, M, D, L (controller Maximum current P= 15 W (power supply Vdc)
P=40 VA (Vac)
with terminal
connected)
Tab. 3.a
If the control cables have to cross over the power cables, the intersections
must be as near as possible to 90 degrees, always avoiding running the
control cables parallel to the power cables.
Important:
• power supplies other than those specified seriously damage the
• Use cable ends suitable for the corresponding terminals. Loosen
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Anchoring the pRack PR300T
The pRack PR300T is installed on a DIN rail. To fasten the unit to the
DIN rail, press it lightly against the rail. The rear tabs will click into place,
locking the unit to the rail. Removing the unit is just as Simple, using a
screwdriver through the release slot to lever and lift the tabs. The tabs are
kept in the locked position by springs.
system;
• a Class II safety transformer, must be used in the installation to supply
each screw and insert the cable ends, then tighten the screws. When
the operation is completed, slightly tug the cables to check they are
sufficiently tight;
separate as much as possible the sensor Signal, digital input and serial
line cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables
to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never insert power
cables (including the electrical cables) and probe Signal cables in
the same conduits. Do not install the sensor cables in the immediate
vicinity of power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or similar);
reduce the path of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid
spiral paths that enclose power devices;
avoid touching or nearly touching the electronic components fitted
on the boards to avoid electrostatic discharges (extremely damaging)
from the operator to the components;
if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth
wire corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters
terminal G0; this applies to all the devices connected to the pRack
PR300T;
do not secure the cables to the terminals by pressing the screwdriver
with excessive force, to avoid damaging the pRack PR300T;
for applications subject to considerable vibrations (1.5 mm pk-pk
10/55 Hz), secure the cables connected to the pRack PR300 around 3
cm from the connectors using clamps;
if the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the
EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less
than 30 m;
just one pRack PR300T controller, rating 30 VA for pRack Compact and
50 VA for pRack S, M, L;
• the power supply to the pRack PR300T controller and terminal (or
pRack PR300T controllers and terminals) should be separated from
the power supply to the other electrical devices (contactors and other
electromechanical components) inside the electrical panel;
• if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth
wire corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters
terminal G0. This applies to all the devices connected to the pRack
PR300T;
• a yellow LED indicates that power is connected to the pRack PR300T.
3.3 Connecting the analogue inputs
The analogue inputs on the pRack PR300T can be configured for the most
common sensors on the market: 0 to 1 V, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA.
The different types of sensors for each input can be selected by setting a
parameter on the user terminal.
23
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
3.3.1
Connecting universal NTC temperature sensors
3.3.3
The analogue inputs are compatible with 2-wire NTC sensors.
The inputs must be set for NTC Signals from the user terminal or using the
default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown
below:
Connecting current pressure probes
pRack PR300T can be connected to all CAREL SPK* series active pressure
probes or any other pressure sensors available on the market with 0…20
mA or 4…20 mA Signal.
The inputs must be set for 0…20 mA or 4…20 mA Signals from the user
terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
pR300T
pR300T
GND
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
J24
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
+5VREF
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
+Vterm
J24
+5VREF
G0
G
J1
Fig. 3.a
Hardware versions
Terminals
GND
U1...U10, S2, S4
S, M, D, L
NTC probe cable
1
2
Fig. 3.c
Hardware versions Terminals
+VDC
S, M, D, L
U1...U10, S1, S3
Tab. 3.b
Note: the two wires of the NTC sensors are equivalent, as they have
no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific order
when connecting to the terminal block.
Description
Power supply
Signal
Tab. 3.d
Important: do not connect the green wire.
Connecting PT1000 temperature sensors
3.3.4
The pRack PR300T can be connected to 2-wire PT1000 sensors for all high
temperature applications; the operating range is: -100 to 200 °C.
The inputs must be pre-configured for PT1000 Signals from the user
terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
Connecting 0 to 5 V ratiometric pressure probes
pRack PR300T can be connected to any other pressure probes available
on the market with 0 to 5 V ratiometric sensor.
The inputs must be set for 0 to 5 V Signals from the user terminal or using
the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
pR300T
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
J2
U1
+5VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
pR300T
U2
3.3.2
Probe cable colour
brown
white
G0
G
J1
Fig. 3.b
Hardware versions
S, M, D, L
Terminals
GND
U1...U10
Fig. 3.d
PT1000 probe cable
1
2
Tab. 3.c
Hardware ver. Terminals
+5 V ref
S, M, D, L
GND
U1...U10, S1, S3
Important: for correct measurement by the PT1000 sensor, each
sensor wire needs to be connected to a dedicated terminal, as
shown in Fig. 3.b.
Note: the two wires of the PT1000 sensors are equivalent, as they
have no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific
order when connecting to the terminal block.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
24
Probe cable colour
black
green
white
Description
Power supply
Power reference
Signal
Tab. 3.e
ENG
3.3.5
Connecting 0…10 V active probes
3.4 Connecting the digital inputs
PRack PR300T can be connected to 0…10 V sensors.
The inputs must be set for 0…10 V Signals from the user terminal or using
the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
The pRack PR300T features digital inputs for connecting safety devices,
alarms, device status and remote switches. These inputs are all optically
isolated from the other terminals. They can work at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc and
some at 230 Vac for S, M, L models.
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
GND
U3
U2
U1
GND
J2
+5VREF
J24
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
+VDC
Note: separate the sensor Signal and digital input cables as much
as possible from the inductive load and power cables, to avoid
possible electromagnetic disturbance.
Important:
• if the control voltage is drawn in parallel with a coil, fit a dedicated RC
filter in parallel with the coil (the typical ratings are 100 Ω, 0.5 μF, 630 V).
• If connecting the digital inputs to safety systems (alarms), remember
that: the presence of voltage across the contact must be the normal
operating condition, while no voltage must represent an alarm
situation. This will ensure that any interruption (or disconnection) of
the input will also be Signalled. Do not connect the neutral in place
of an open digital input. Always interrupt the phase. The 24 Vac/Vdc
digital inputs have a Resistance of around 5 kΩ.
out H
M
out T
+ (G)
Fig. 3.e
Hardware versions
S, M, L, D
Terminals
+VDC
GND
U1...U10
Description
Power supply (if used)
Reference
Signal
All pRack digital inputs can be powered at 24 Vac and 24 Vdc, while for
models M, L only 230 Vac inouts are also available.
To maintain the optical isolation of the digital inputs, a separate power
supply must be used just for the digital inputs.
The connection diagrams shown in these figures, which while being the
more common and the more convenient, do not exclude the possibility
of powering the digital inputs independently from the power supply to
the pRack PR300T.
In any case, the inputs only have functional insulation from the rest of
the controller.
Tab. 3.f
3.3.6
ConnectingtheanalogueinputsselectedasON/OFF
The pRack PR300T allows some analogue inputs to be configured as
voltage-free digital inputs, not optically-isolated.
The inputs must be pre-configured as voltage-free digital inputs from the
user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
24 Vac digital inputs
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
Fig. 3.f
Hardware Version
S, M
S, M, L
Terminals
BC4, BC5
U4, U5
U4, U5, U9, U10
U4, U5, U9, U10
G
Digital input cable
1
2
1
2
G0
Tab. 3.g
Fig. 3.g
Important: the maximum current available at the digital input is 5
mA (thus the rating of the external contact must be at least 5 mA). These
inputs are not optically-isolated.
24 Vdc digital inputs
3.3.7
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vdc
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
Remote connection of the analogue inputs
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the analogue inputs
are shown in the following table:
Type of input
NTC
PT1000
current
voltage
Size [mm2] for
length up to 50 m
0.5
0.75
0.25
0.25
Size [mm2] for
length up to 100 m
1.0
1.5
0.5
0.5
24 Vdc
Tab. 3.h
+
If the product is installed in industrial enviroment (in compliance for
the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less
than 30m. In any case you should never exceed this length to have no
measurement errors.
–
Fig. 3.h
25
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
230 Vac digital inputs
3.5.2
pRack M, L models have up to two groups of inputs powered at 230 Vac
50/60 Hz +10/-15%; each group features two inputs (see paragraph 2.2.1
for details). The groups have double insulation between them and can
have different voltages.
Module for converting a PWM analogue output to a liner 0…10 V
and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0)
The module is used to convert a PWM output (5 V pulses) to a liner 0…10
V and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0). The control Signal
(at the input terminals optically-isolated from the rest of the module)
must have a maximum amplitude of 5V and a period between 8 ms and
200 ms. The 0…10 V output voltage can be connected to a maximum
load of 2 kΩ, with a maximum ripple of 100 mV.
The 4…20 mA current output can be connected to a maximum load of
280 Ω, with maximum overshoot of 0.3 mA.
The mechanical dimensions of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN
modules) with IP20 index of protection.
Important: within each group the inputs must be powered at the
same voltage to avoid short-circuits or powering lower voltage
inputs at 230 Vac.
ID18
DC17
ID17
GND
J20
U10
Y6
U9
GND
Y5
ID16
ID16H
IDC15
J19
ID15
ID15H
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 230 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
Optional modules
Module for converting a 0…10 V analogue output to an SPDT
digital output (code CONVONOFF0)
The module is used to convert a 0…10 V analogue output to an ON/OFF
relay output. The control Signal (at the input terminals, optically-isolated
from the rest of the module), to ensure the switching of the relay from OFF
to ON, must have a maximum amplitude of 3.3 V. The relay is SPDT, with
max current of 10 A and max inductive load of 1/3 HP. The mechanical
dimensions of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN modules) with IP20
index of protection.
Fig. 3.i
3.4.1
3.6 Connecting the digital outputs
Remote connection of the digital inputs
Important note: do not connect other devices to the digital inputs
IDn inputs.
3.6.1
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital inputs are
shown in the following table:
Size (mm2) for length up to 50 m
0,25
Electromechanical relay digital outputs
The pRack PR300T features digital outputs with electromechanical relays.
For ease of installation, the common terminals of some of the relays have
been grouped together. The following figure illustrates a connection
example. If the following this diagram is used, the current at the common
terminals must not exceed the rating (nominal current) of a single
terminal (8 A).
Size (mm2) for length until 100 m
0,5
110/230 - 24 Vac
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30
m. This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement
errors.
3.5 Connecting the analogue outputs
3.5.1
Connecting 0…10 V analogue outputs
The pRack PR300T provides 0…10 V optically-isolated analogue outputs,
powered externally at 24 Vac/Vdc. The figure below shows the electrical
connection diagram; the 0V (zero) of the power supply is also the
reference for the output voltage:
Fig. 3.k
The relays are divided into groups, according to the degree of insulation.
Inside each group, the relays have just basic insulation and thus must
have the same voltage (generally 24V ac or 110 to 230 Vac).
Between the groups there is double insulation and thus the groups can
have different voltages. There is also double insulation from the rest of
the controller.
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
U9
GND
Y6
Y5
J20
Changeover outputs
Some relays feature changeover outputs, the number of changeover
outputs depends on whether or not there are solid state relays (SSR) and
consequently varies depending on the models.
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
24 Vac/Vdc
0V
Hardware Version
Fig. 3.j
Changeover relay reference,
without SSR model
Terminal
PRK30T**F* models
Hardware Version
S, M
L
Terminals
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6
Reference
VG0
VG0
S
M
L
Tab. 3.i
8
8, 12, 13
8, 12, 13, 14, 15
J15
J15, J17, J18
J15, J17, J18, J21
PRK30T**E* models
S
M
D
L
8, 13
8, 13
6
J15, J18
Tab. 3.j
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
26
ENG
3.6.2
Solid state relay (SSR) digital outputs
Models PRK100**C* and PRK100**D*
Compact
6
S
7
M
10
-
The pRack PR300T also features a Version with solid state relays (SSR) on
some models for controlling devices that require an unlimited number of
switching cycles and thus would not be supported by electromechanical
relays.
L
13
1 (1)
1 (8)
3 (8, 12, 13)
5 (8, 12, 13,
14, 15)
-
7
8
13
-
18
-
Tab. 3.l
Important: the SSRs can control resistive loads powered at 24 Vac/
Vdc, maximum power Pmax= 10 W. For details see paragraph 2.2.2.
The figure shows a connection example for resistive loads.
3.6.4
An example of resistive loads is illustrated in the the following figure:
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital outputs
are shown in the following table:
Remote connection of the digital outputs
Size [mm2]
0,5
1,5
2,5
24 Vac
AWG
20
15
14
Current [A]
2A
6A
8A
Tab. 3.m
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m.
This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement errors.
Fig. 3.l
3.7 pLAN electrical connections
The following figure illustrates correct applications for inductive loads.
If the selected system configuration involves the connection of more
than one pRack PR300T board in a pLAN, AWG20/22 twisted pair shielded
cable must be used, with capacitance between the wires less than 90
PF/m. The maximum length of the pLAN network is 500 m with AWG22
twisted pair shielded cable. The boards should be connected in parallel
with reference to plug-in connector J5 (pRack Compact) or J11 (Versions
S, M, L).
external SSR
C9
NO17
NO18
C9
NO9
NC15
C15
J16
J21
J26 FBus2
NO11
NO10
C16
J15
NO16
C8
NC8
C7
1
NC14
2
NO15
NO8
C7
3
C14
4
NO14
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J13
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
input
load
management
J22
Important: follow the network polarity: RX/TX+ on one board must
be connected to RX/TX+ on the other boards; the same applies to
RX/TX-.
The figure shows the diagram for more than one board connected
in a pLAN network powered by the same transformer; this is a typical
application with more than one board connected inside the same
electrical panel.
pR300T
pR300
Y5
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
U7
IDC1
J6
U6
ID8
ID7
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J19
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
G0
+Vterm
G
J24
ID6
FieldBus ca r d
J1
Fig. 3.m
AWG 20/22
NC1
2
NO1
NO2
NO13
C9
C12
C1
NO11
C9
NO9
NO10
NO12
C16
NO17
NO18
J20
U9
GND
U10
ID13H
ID13
IDC1
VG 3
Y6
Y5
ID16H
FieldBus card
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
IDC9
ID12
GND
ID11
U5
ID10
GND
ID9
U4
GND
+VDC
J7
J3
U8
GND
J2
J6
U7
U3
IDC1
U1
U6
U2
+5 VREF
ID8
+Vterm
J24
ID6
GND
ID7
ID4
G0
ID3
G
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
J1
ID5
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G
J24
GND
U10
IDC13
G0
GND
ID13
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
ID9
U8
U7
+Vterm
U9
ID13H
Y6
Y5
ID16H
ID16
ID15H
IDC15
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
J1
J7
J6
J19
B M S car d
J20
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
ID15
J19
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
pR300T
FieldBus card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
+Vterm
G
J1
J23 FBu
J22
pR300T
BMS card
C16
C15
NC15
C14
NC14
J21
J26 FBus2
J23 FB
J22
pR300T
FieldBus ca rd
J1J1
72
J16
NO16
C8
C7
NC8
NO8
J15
J11 pLAN
2 1
J10
NO15
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
C4
NO5
NO4
J25 BMS2
3
NO14
NC12
C12
NO12
J14
4
C16
NO17
NO18
NO16
C16
NC15
J13
J10
J17
J21
J26 FBus2
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
NO9
C8
NO8
NC8
J16
C15
1
C14
2
NC14
3
J15
NO15
C7
C7
4
NO14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
C1
J11 pLAN
J14
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
J13
J12
NO3
C1
input
load
management
NO2
external SSR
NO1
24 Vac/Vdc
AWG 20/22
Dedicated or the same of
G-G0 but not in common
with other external load
Fig. 3.n
The table below shows the reference outputs for pRack models fitted
with SSR outputs.
Hardware Version
S
M
L
Reference Relay SSR
7, 8
7, 8, 12, 13
7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15
Fig. 3.o
Terminal
J14, J15
J14, J15, J17, J18
J14, J15, J17, J18, J21
Tab. 3.k
Important: pLAN connections are also possible with multiple boards
powered by different transformers, for further details see the pCO Sistema
manual, code: +030220335.
3.7.1
Important: the SSR relay load is powered at 24 Vac/Vdc, thus all the
other terminals in the group must be powered at 24 Vac/Vdc due to
the absence of double insulation within the group.
3.6.3
Connecting the terminals
pRack PR300T features PGDE terminals, both built-in and external
connected via pLAN. Up to two external terminals can be connected,
with pLAN addresses 31 and 32. The connection can be made using
6-wire telephone cables (connector J10 for S, M, L models) or shielded
pair cables with 3-pin plug-in connectors (J11 for S, M, L models), as
shown in the table:
Summary table of digital outputs according to the
Versions available
Hardware
changeover total no.
NO contacts NC contacts
SSR relays
Version
contacts
of outputs
Models PRK100**A* and PRK100**B*
Compact
5
7
2 (1, 2)
S
6
8
2 (7, 8)
M
9
2 (8, 13)
13
2 (7, 12)
4 (7, 12, 14,
L
12
2 (8, 13)
18
15)
Type of cable Power supply distance
6-wire
10 m
telephone (J10)
AWG24
200 m
AWG20/22
500 m
Power supply
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
Separate, from TCONN6J000
Tab. 3.n
27
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
4. START UP
4.1 Starting the first time
Note: after having configured the parameters using the Wizard, the
configuration can be modified manually, within the context of the
selected system configuration.
Important: before starting the pRack PR300T, carefully check the
settings made automatically by the software.
After having correctly installed pRack, a number of preliminary operations
are required to configure the installation.
Tutorial: the pRack PR300 configuration procedure varies according
to the complexity of the installation:
A. systems with only one board and maximum one external terminal.
In this case, simply connect the terminal (if not built-in), power up the
board and select one of the configuration solutions described below.
B. systems with more than one board in pLAN or two external
terminals. IIn this case, the additional operations described in
Appendix A. 2 need to be completed before proceeding with
configuration.
Tutorial: the following paragraph shows a configuration example
using the Wizard for an installation with two suction lines.
4.3 Exampleofsystemconfigurationusingthe
Wizard
This describes a possible example of Wizard-led configuration for a type
of system like the one shown in the figure, with 2 suction lines and part
in high pressure (gas cooler and HPV, RPRV valves) on 3 different control
boards:
The procedure for configuring an installation described below is the same
for all system configurations that feature just one pRack PR300 board,
and for system configurations with more than one board connected in
a pLAN.
When first starting the pRack PR300 board, after waiting around 1 minute,
a screen is shown for choosing the language used to display the program
(English or Italian). Press ENTER ( ) to change the language displayed,
while pressing ESC displays the following screen.
pLAN 3
address
pLAN 1
address
Note: If no option is chosen within a time set by parameter and
visible on the screen, the current language remains selected.
After having selected the user interface language, the pRack PR300
software shows a screen for choosing between three possible system
configuration solutions, as follows:
• Wizard
• Advanced configuration.
Important: after having configured the system, the configuration
can be modified, it can be modified by repeating the same
procedure, making sure the Carel default values have been reset.
After having restored the defaults, the 7 segment display will show the
number 88, the same as when first starting the controller. This means that
the DEFAULT values have been restored correctly.
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG
VG0
J4
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
J2
pLAN 2
address
Fig. 4.b
Fig. 4.a
The preliminary operations to be performed before configuration are:
1. with the boards not connect to the pLAN, power up the second and third
Important: after having configured the system, power down the
controller and power up again.
pRack board and set the pLAN address to 2 and 3 (for details, refer to
Appendix A.1)
2. remove power and connect the boards and any terminal to the pLAN as
described in paragraph 3.7.
3. power the board and wait for the Wizard selection to appear
4.2 Wizard
At this point, select the type of installation as SUCTION+CONDENSER:
This solution is for obtaining the recommended configuration for the
system. By responding to a series of questions, from screen to screen, the
user is guided in choosing the devices that are present. Once the guided
procedure is finished, the final obtainable results can be viewed (report)
and, if the configuration is correct, direct installation can be performed of
the parameters for pRack pR300T operation, including those associated
with the inputs and outputs as described in paragraph 4.4.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
28
ENG
Set the type of compressors and regulation of suction line 1 by answering
the questions asked by the pRack pR300T software, for example:
Note: (*) ENABLE, for valves driven directly by Carel driver, if you need 0-10V
(as described in page 49, paragraph 6.15.1...), please set DISABLE
After having configured condensing line 1, the software asks if there is a
condensing line 2; answer NO to this question:
At this point, the software asks if you wish to view a report of the settings
performed:
If the settings are correct, you can proceed to install the set values:
After having configured suction line 1, the unit asks if another suction line
needs to be configured, which must be answered YES:
After a few seconds, the unit can be started.
Answer YES to the next question which asks if a dedicated pRack board
is present; this way the pRack pR300T software is ready to configure the
board with address 2 in pLAN:
Note: after having configured pRack pR300T, the power must be
turned off and back on in order to confirm that the data is saved.
4.4 Advanced configuration
After having answered the question to configure the second suction line,
the software asks if there is a dedicated pLAN board for condensing line
1 In this example, answer YES.
This solution allows you to establish the configuration for the pLAN
structure needed for correct operation of the system.
Once the procedure for choosing the various factors that influence the
final configuration is completed, the pRack pR300T software verifies if the
pLAN configuration is exact and shows the user interface for configuring
the parameters that must be manually performed by the user.
Attention: this configuration method is recommended only for
expert users, since all system parameters must be manually configured.
(*)
(*)
29
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
4.4.1
pRack PR300T assigns in order:
Associating the inputs and outputs
• Pressure or temperature control probes for 1 or 2 lines, according to the
When using pre-configurations and the wizard, pRack PR300T can
automatically associate the board’s inputs and outputs with the various
functions.
For the wizard only, after having configured the lines, automatic association
can be chosen as an option. If choosing not to use this function, the I/Os
need to be configured manually, according to requirements.
•
•
•
•
The criteria applied for automatic association are described below.
Digital outputs
pRack PR300T assigns in order:
• Compressor outputs
• Fan outputs
• Global alarm.
settings made. The types of probe asSigned as default are 4…20 mA
or 0 to 5 V (first 4…20 mA, then 0 to 5 V if necessary) for the pressure
probes, NTC for the suction temperature probes and HTNTC for the
condensing temperature probes;
Suction temperature probe on line 1: if possible this is associated with
input U3, otherwise the first free input;
Discharge temperature probe on line 1;
Suction temperature probe on line 2;
Discharge temperature probe on line 2.
Analogue outputs
pRack PR300T assigns in order:
• Compressor inverters for 1 or 2 lines;
• Fan modulating devices.
Digital inputs
pRack PR300T assigns in order:
• High and low pressure switches (HP and LP)
• Compressor alarms
• Fan alarms
Note: pRack PR300T can also use certain analogue inputs as digital
inputs, nonetheless the common HP and LP pressure switches are always
associated with actual digital inputs.
Analogue inputs
5. USER INTERFACE
5.1 Graphic terminal
5.2 Description of the display
The pRack PR300T user interface is represented by the pGDE terminal,
panel or built-in versions. The functions associated with the 6 buttons on
the pGDE terminal are the same on all the screens and are described in
the table below.
There are three fundamental types of screens shown to the user:
• Main screen
• Menu screen
• Screen for displaying/setting the parameters
Functions of the 6 buttons
Main screen
The main screen is the screen that the software on board pRack PR300T
automatically returns to 5 minutes after the last button was pressed.
Button
Function associated
displays the list of active alarms and accesses the alarm
(ALARM)
log
An example of the main screen is shown in the figure, highlighting the
fields and icons used:
used to enter the main menu tree
returns to the higher level screen
1
scrolls a list upwards or increases the value highlighted
by the cursor
scrolls a list downwards or decreases the value
(DOWN)
highlighted by the cursor
(UP)
(ENTER)
2
enters the selected submenu or confirms the set value.
Tab. 5.a
The LEDs associated with the buttons have the following meanings.
3
Meaning of LEDs
LED
Red
Button
pRack 14:30 20/01/10
Suction:
L1:
26.16barg
L2:
12.06barg
Gas Cooler: 64.44barg
Unit OFF by
keyboard
4
5
Fig. 5.a
Meaning
Flashing: active alarms present and not acknowledged
Steady: alarms present and acknowledged
Yellow
pRack PR300T on
Green
pRack PR300T powered
1 Time and date
2 Main values.
3 Unit status (unit off ) or compressor and fan status (unit on)
4 Active alarm Signal and manual operation
5 Access further information screens (menu branch A.a) by pressing button
.
The information relating to the main values (Fig. 5.a) shown on the main
screen when first starting vary according to the system configuration
(one line, two lines, two lines with shared condenser) and the type of
control value (pressure, temperature).
Tab. 5.b
Note: The other information shown in menu branch A.a. varies
according to the system configuration. For two line systems,
pressing
from the main screen accesses a different screen based on
the starting point (line 1, line 2).
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
30
ENG
Starting in version 3.3.0, the main screen can be modified, both in terms
of the probe displayed and the value used, from the menu at: F.SETTINGS
Æb.LanguageÆ Fb04
Menu screen
An example of a menu screen is shown in the figure below:
Fig. 5.b
The top right corner shows the selected item and the current password
level (for details see the following paragraph). The
and
buttons
are used to select the desired menu item, while
accesses the selected
item.
After having set the “probe configurations” (screen Fb04) under
“CONFIGURE” and having pressed “ENTER” button, screen Fb05 can be
accessed:
Screen for displaying/setting the parameters
An example of a screen for displaying/setting the parameters is shown in
the figure, also highlighting the fields and icons used:
2
1
Here, for example, the receiver pressure can be entered (rather than the
discharge or intercooler temperature), the order of the probes shown can
be reversed, and the saturated values of the probe readings displayed.
In the same way, the positon of the compressor or fan status information in
the unit status display (3, Fig.5.a) can be changed, accessing “CONFIGURE”
for the “Info Configuration” field on screen Fb04:
3
Fig. 5.c
1
2
3
Menu branch identifier
Screen identifier
Parameter
The screen identifier uniquely identifies the menu branch and the
screen: the first characters indicate the menu branch, while the last two
alphanumeric digits identify the order of the screen inside the menu, for
example screen Bab01 is the first screen in menu B.a.b.
Once again, pressing “ENTER” accesses screens Fb09 and Fb10:
Note: The information on the screens may vary according to the
password level used to access the menu.
5.3 Password
pRack PR300T manages three levels of password:
• User
• Maintenance
• Manufacturer
Each level includes the same rights as the lower levels, that is, the
Manufacturer can access all the screens and parameters, the Maintenance
can access the screens and parameters available in the Maintenance and
User levels, while the User can only access the screens and parameters
available in the User level.
Note: All levels display the main screens and the other information
screens.
When pressing
a prompt is shown to enter the password, which
remains active for 5 minutes after the last button is pressed.
In this way, for example, the backpressure or flash gas valve opening
percentage can be entered
The menu screens show their own password level using an icon at the
top right: 1 line: user, 2 lines: maintenance, 3 lines: manufacturer.
The password level can be changed from menu branch F.c. at any time.
The password can also be changed in the corresponding menu branch.
31
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
5.4 Menu description
A . Unit status
B . Inputs/outputs
a . Main info
b . Set point
c . On/Off
a . Status
b .
Manual manag.
c . Test
C . Compressors
a . Line 1
D . Condensers
b . Line 2 (*)
c . Parallel comp.
a . Gas cooler
a . Oil
a . I/O status
b . Control
c . EVD driver
d . En. saving
e . Alarms
f . Configuration
g . Advanced
a . I/O status
b . Control
c . EVD driver
d . En. saving
e . Alarms
f . Configuration
g . Advanced
a . Line 1
b . Subcooling
b . Line 2 (*)
a . Line 1
c . Economizer
b . Line 2 (*)
a . Line 1
d . Liquid inj.
b . Line 2 (*)
a . Line 1
b . Intercooler (**)
E . Other functions
e . Heat recovery
f . Generic functions
g . Chillerbooster
h . DSS
i . Transcritical
F . Settings
G . Safety
a . Clock
b . Languages
c . BMS
d . Fieldbus
e . Passwords
a . Alarm log
b . Prevent.
c . Alarm config.
H . Info
I . Setup
a . Pre-configurations
b . Wizard
c . Advanced config.
d . Default
(*) this menu level is only visible for system configurations with two lines.
Note:
• The figure illustrates the maximum menu configuration visible with
the Manufacturer password. If accessing with the User or Maintenance
password, only the menu items available are visible
• For some menu items, access is possible with different password levels
(e.g. I/O status), but the information available on the screens changes.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
a . Digital inputs
b . Analogue inputs
c . Digital outputs
d . Analogue outputs
a . Digital out
b . Analogue out
c . Vacuum
a . Digital out
b . Analogue out
a . I/O status
b . Control
c . Op. hours
d . En. saving
e . Alarms
f . Configuration
g . Advanced
……
32
b . Line 2 (*)
a . I/O status
b . Settings
a . Stages
b . Modulation
c . Alarms
d . Time bands
e . I/O status
a . I/O status
b . Settings
a . I/O status
b . Settings
a . I/O status
b . Settings
c . EVO Settings
a . Time bands
b . Adjust.
a . Line 1
b . Line 2 (*)
a . Line 1
b . Line 2 (*)
a . I/O status
b . Settings
……
a . I/O status
b . Settings
c . EVV
……
a . I/O status
b . Settings
……
a . I/O status
b . Settings
……
ENG
6.
FUNCTIONS
6.1 Schematic diagram and system
configurations used
Configuration 2: 1 a pRack pR300T board for each suction line and 1
pRack pR300T board for control of the high pressure part (gas cooler and
HPV, RPRV valves):
The schematic diagram of a transcritical system is shown in the figure:
pLAN 3
address
pLAN 1
address
RPRV
P
T
P
T
HPV
pLAN 2
address
P
T
P
T
Fig. 6.c
Fig. 6.a
Configuration 3: a pRack pR300T board to manage the medium
temperature suction line and control of the high pressure part and a
board for managing the low temperature suction line:
This shows the two medium and low temperature lines, the HPV valve,
which separates the high pressure part of the circuit from the medium
pressure part, and the RPRV valve which regulates the pressure in the
receiver. Both valves can be managed directly by the controller with builtin driver (PRK30TD*).
Management of the system can be performed using one of the system
configurations described hereafter.
Configuration 1: a pRack pR300T board for managing both suction lines
and control of the high pressure part (this configuration can be used also
as a backup controller):
pLAN 1
address
pLAN 2
address
pLAN 1
address
Fig. 6.d
Fig. 6.b
33
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Configuration 4: a pRack pR300T board for managing the two suction
lines and a board for control of the high pressure part:
Note: certain special conditions or functions in the pRack software
cause the unit to shutdown:
• Configuration of some parameters: e.g. inputs/outputs, configuration
of compressors, inverter parameters.
• Installation of default parameters
• Manual management
pLAN 3
address
6.3 Control
pRack PR300T can manage two types of control:
• Proportional band (P, P+I);
• Neutral zone (fixed times, variable times).
pLAN 1
address
Both types of control can be applied to both compressors and
condensers, according to the settings defined during start-up or in main
menu branches C.a.b/C.b.b and D.a.b/D.b.b.
The type of control chosen is independent for each line present, either
suction or condenser. In addition, pRack PR300T can use as the reference
for control either the pressure or the converted temperature, or the
temperature read by probe if there is no pressure probe, even if reference
is only made to pressure below.
The control set point can be compensated by an offset linked to digital
inputs, probes, supervisor or time bands, for details see paragraph 6.5
relating to compressor and fan energy saving. Both types of control are
described below, and are valid for both control of suction pressure and
condensing pressure, and operation with backup probes and/or probes
not working.
Fig. 6.e
6.3.1
6.2 Unit On-Off
Proportional band
The operating principle is normal proportional or proportional + integral
control (P, P+I).
The unit can be switched on and off from:
• User terminal
• Supervisor
• Digital input
The control set point is central, consequently - for proportional control
only - operation is schematised in the following figure:
On-off from the user terminal and the configuration parameters are
available under the main menu, branch A.c, and are differentiated based
on the access level; the User password allows display only.
Regulation request
100%
On-off from the supervisor and from the digital input and start-up after
a blackout (with specific delay, to avoid continuous starts and stops in
the event of instability in the power supply) must be enabled using the
parameters visible only with the Manufacturer password.
On-off from the digital input is equivalent to an enabling Signal, that is, if
the digital input is Off the unit cannot be switched on in any other way,
while if is On, the unit can be switched on or off in any other way, with
the same priority (the most recent control has precedence, whatever the
origin), as shown in the figure:
Differential
Differential
Regulation
probe value
Setpoint
Fig. 6.g
Digital Input
For example, for 4 devices with the same capacity and proportional only
control, start-up occurs as shown in the figure:
User interface
Devices activation
Supervisor
Unit On/Off
C1
C2
C3
C4
Fig. 6.f
When there are two suction and condenser lines, on-off is independent for
each line, while when there are two suction lines and one condenser line,
it is independent for the suction lines, while the condenser line stops when
both suction lines are off, and starts when at least one suction line is ON.
Differential
Differential
Setpoint
Fig. 6.h
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
34
Suction
pressure
ENG
With P+I control, added to the effect of the proportional action described
above is the integral action, used to achieve a null control error in steady
operation, as shown in the figure:
For control in Neutral zone, the parameters shown in the figure must be
set:
NZ timings
Regulation variable
P+I
Decrease
zone
Neutral
zone
Increase
zone
P
Max time 100%
Max time 0%
Setpoint
Min time 0%
Min time 100%
time
Fig. 6.i
Decr. Diff.
The integral action depends on the time and the deviation from the set
point. This modifies the request if the control value does not approach
the set point for some time.
The integral time setting represents how fast integral control is
implemented:
• low values determine fast and intense control action
• high values determine slower and more stable control action
It is recommended to not set a value that is too low for the integral time,
to avoid instability.
Regulation
probe value
As well as the decrease and increase differentials, 4 times need to be set,
two for each zone, which represent the maximum and minimum time
to reach the request, equal to 0% or 100%, for the decrease and increase
respectively.
Tutorial: the decrease/increase times (minimum and maximum)
represent the time needed to change from maximum to minimum
capacity and vice-versa, and not the time between the deactivation/
activation of the individual device. For example, in the case of 4 devices
with the same capacity, an increase time of 180 s means that one device
is activated every 45 s.
Neutral zone
In the situation shown in the figure, the request sent by the controller
decreases/increases slowly as soon as the controlled value is outside of
the Neutral zone, while it decreases/increases quickly the further the
controlled value moves away from the Neutral zone; in this way the
response of the system is faster when further from steady conditions.
Regulation request
Neutral
zone
Incr. Diff.
Fig. 6.k
The operating principle is schematised in the following figure:
Decrease
zone
Diff.
Setpoint
Note: the set point is in the centre of the activation band, therefore
when reaching the set point some devices are on, even with purely
proportional control.
6.3.2
Diff.
Increase
zone
100%
Note: When using fixed times, the maximum and minimum must
be set to the same value. In this case, the request sent by the
controller decreases/increases constantly inside the deactivation/
activation differential.
6.3.3
Force off
Diff.
Diff.
Regulation
probe value
Modulation in Neutral zone
pRack PR300T can activate a specific function inside the Neutral zone if
modulating devices are used (e.g.: inverters). This function can be enabled
in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g.
Setpoint
Modulation in Neutral zone is used to vary the request sent by the
controller inside the Neutral zone proportionally so as to enter the
decrease zone with the minimum request and the increase zone with the
maximum request, meaning a device can be immediately deactivated/
activated when exiting the Neutral zone.
This makes it possible to remain longer inside the neutral zone without
starting or stopping any device.
An example of this operation is shown in the figure:
Fig. 6.j
Inside the neutral zone the capacity request sent by the controller is
constant (except when there is a modulation device and modulation is
enabled inside the neutral zone, as described in the following paragraph)
and the value satisfies the temperature control request in those specific
operating conditions, therefore within this zone no device is stopped or
started.
In the decrease zone, the request also decreases at a rate that depends on
the deviation from the set point, and vice-versa in the increase zone the
request increases proportionally to the deviation.
Regulation request
Neutral zone
100%
For the increase and decrease zones, the following can be used:
• Fixed times: the request decreases or increases constantly as time
elapses.
• Variable times: the request decreases or increases more quickly
(according to the settings) as the deviation from the set point increases.
P1
Note: The previous figure shows the increase and decrease with
fixed times.
Regulation probe value
Fig. 6.l
35
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
When entering the Neutral zone, the pRack PR300T software calculates
how the request needs to change in order to exit the Neutral zone at
minimum or maximum output, and applies one of the two values
according to the trend in variation in the control variable. For example, at
point P1 in the figure, the trend of the two requests is represented by the
segments with thin lines, and the request ‘reverses’ because at that point
the control variable has started increasing in value again.
The compressor size refers to its capacity and number of load stages or
to the inverter presence, therefore different sizes need to be defined
for compressors with the same capacity yet a different number of load
stages. The inverter is always associated to size 1.
Note: When exiting the Neutral zone, it is possible that the request
is not at the minimum or maximum value, where limitation is enabled for
of the modulating device variation speed.
• One line, 4 scroll compressors with the same capacity, the first Digital
6.3.4
Control with backup probes and/or probes not
working
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity and 4
pRack PR300T can use backup control probes that are activated when the
normal control probes are not working.
2 with 4 reciprocating compressors, the first with inverter (1 size line 1,
2 sizes line 2).
Tutorial: below is one example of some possible configurations:
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first
with inverter (2 sizes).
Scroll™ (1 sizes).
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first
two with 4 load stages, the other two not capacity-controlled (2 sizes).
load stages each (1 size).
• Two lines, line 1 with 4 scroll compressors, the first Digital Scroll™, line
The backup probes must be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g
or D.a.g/D.b.g.
6.4.2
When different pRack boards are used to manage the suction and
condenser lines, the backup suction pressure probe must be connected
to the board that manages the suction line, while the backup condensing
pressure probe can be connected either to the board that manages the
suction line or the board that manages the condenser line.
pRack PR300T can manage 4 different types of device rotation:
• FIFO (First In First Out): the first device to start is also the first to stop
• LIFO (Last In First Out): the last device to start is the first to stop
• By time: the device with the least number of operating hours starts and
the device with highest number of operating hours stops
• Custom: the on/off sequences are defined by the user
If the main control probes are not working and no backup probes are
fitted, or the backup probes are also not working, or the corresponding
temperature probes are also not working, fixed values are used for the
control request, set in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g.
NB: Different Sizes of compressors can only be managed with
Custom rotation.
The type of rotation is selected and the corresponding parameters set
during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
The activation thresholds are calculated differently depending on
whether FIFO, LIFO, time or Custom rotation is used:
6.4 Compressors
pRack PR300T can manage up to 2 suction lines with different types of
compressors and capacity modulation devices, applying common types
of device rotation and controlling both the start mode and the safety
times for each type of compressor, as well as a number of accessory
functions. The compressor functions and related parameter settings are
enabled from main menu branch C.a/C.b. These features and functions
are described in detail in the following paragraphs.
6.4.1
Rotation
Device activation threshold calculation
Rotation
FIFO
LIFO
By time
Custom
Possible compressor configurations
pRack PR300T can manage different types of compressors:
• Reciprocating
• Scroll
Threshold calculation
Static: the range of variation of the control request is divided
equally between the number of stages available
Dynamic: the thresholds are calculated depending on the
capacity effectively available
Tab. 6.c
Example 1: FIFO rotation, 4 compressors of the same capacity
without load stages.
The activation thresholds are 25, 50, 75 and 100 %.
Moreover, a capacity modulation device is allowed for each suction line,
which may be one of the following, according to the type of compressor:
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
C1
modulation devices
Inverter
Inverter
Digital Scroll™
Scroll
C2
25%
Tab. 6.a
C3
50%
C4
75%
100%
Regulation request
Fig. 6.m
Note: The same modulation device is used on each line.
Example 2: Custom rotation, 4 compressors with capacities of 10,
20, 30 and 40 kW. The activation thresholds with all the compressors
available are 10, 30, 60, 100 %.
The maximum number of compressors and load stages per line varied
according to the type of compressor:
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
Scroll
Maximum No.
12
12
Load stages
24 total
24 total
C1
C2
C3
C4
Tab. 6.b
10%
30%
60%
Fig. 6.n
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
36
100%
Regulation request
ENG
It can be seen that the capacity delivered exactly follows the required
capacity, except when below the minimum capacity of the modulating
device.
If an alarm is active on compressor 3, the recalculated activation
thresholds are 10, 30, 70 %.
Actual capacity (kW)
100
C2
C4
80
10%
30%
70%
60
Regulation request
Fig. 6.o
40
Activation of the compressors and load stages may be:
• Grouped (CpppCppp): first all the load stages are activated on one
compressor before starting the next one
• Balanced (CCpppppp): first all the compressors are started at minimum
capacity and then the corresponding load stages are activated, one for
each compressor, in sequence.
20
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.p
6.4.3
Rotation with modulation devices
Example 2: range of modulating device capacity variation lower
than the capacity of the compressors: two compressors without
capacity control, with the same capacity, 30 kW each, modulating device
with variable capacity between 20 and 40 kW.
It can be seen that the capacity delivered does not exactly follow the
required capacity, rather acts in steps, so as to avoid swings.
pRack PR300T can also manage compressor rotation when a capacity
modulation device is fitted (inverter, Digital Scroll™ or continuous control).
The type of modulating device is selected and the corresponding
parameters set during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f and C.a.g/C.b.g
The modulating device is always the first to start and the last to stop
irrespective of the type of rotation, the other devices start or stop
according to the type of rotation selected.
Actual capacity (kW)
100
Note: The compressor with modulation device is also assumed to
be the first.
80
60
The trend in capacity delivered by the modulation device depends on
the capacity of the compressor with the modulating device compared to
the other compressors available.
40
20
Three cases can be identified:
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device greater than or equal to the capacity of the
compressors
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device less than the capacity of the compressors
• compressors with different capacities
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.q
Example 3: range of modulating device capacity variation in
between the capacity of the compressors, all different sizes: two
compressors without capacity control, capacities 15 kW and 25 kW,
modulating device with variable capacity between 10 and 30 kW.
In the first case, the modulating device manages to continuously cover
the range of variation of the control request, while in the second case
some discontinuous variations remain. The behaviour in the third case
varies according to the capacities involved, and in any case reflects one
of the two previous cases.
To configure the compressor capacity when an inverter is used, the
minimum and maximum operating frequencies need to be set relating
to the minimum and maximum value of the analogue output and the
rated capacity delivered at rated frequency (50 Hz), so that the pRack
PR300T software can calculate the capacity the compressor can deliver
with the inverter and use this value for control. In addition, for inverters
the variation in capacity delivered can be limited by setting the increase
and decrease times. If these times have already been configured on the
inverter, the higher time set has priority.
Actual capacity (kW)
70
50
30
10
Example 1: range of modulating device capacity variation higher than
the capacity of the compressors:
Two compressors without capacity control, with the same capacity, 20
kW each, modulating device with variable capacity between 30 and 60
kW. The figure shows the trend when the request sent by the controller
increases and then decreases continuously between 0 and 100 %.
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.r
37
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
6.4.4
Starting
6.4.7
pRack PR300T can manage different types of compressor starting:
• Direct
• Part-winding
• Star/delta
Economizer
pRack PR300T can activate the economizer function to boost compressor
efficiency by injecting vapour. Some of the liquid is taken from the
condenser, expanded through a valve and then sent to a heat exchanger
to cool the liquid leaving the condenser. The resulting superheated
vapour is injected into a special section of the compressor.
The type of starting can be selected and the related parameters set in
main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch E.c.a.b.
For part-winding starting, the delay in activating the digital output that
controls the second winding needs to be set:
The economizer is only efficient for high compressor activation capacities,
typically over 75 %, therefore the economizer function control valve is
only activated when exceeding a set threshold.
As the economizer tends to increase the condensing pressure, this needs
to be controlled to ensure the high condensing pressure alarm is not
generated. In addition, the injection of vapour decreases the discharge
temperature and so this value also needs to be monitored.
Consequently, the three conditions for activation of the economizer
function are:
• Capacity above a set threshold
• Condensing pressure below a set threshold (with reset differential)
• Discharge temperature above a set threshold (with reset differential)
Compressor request
Line
Part-winding
Delay
Fig. 6.s
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6
compressors.
For star/delta starting, the star time, the delay between the activation of
the line and star digital input, and between the delta and star digital input
all need to be set, as shown in the figure:
6.4.8
Liquid injection
As an alternative to the economizer, pRack PR300T can manage the
injection of liquid into the compressors (the two functions are alternative,
as the point of vapour injection into the compressor is the same).
Compressor request
Line
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch E.d.a.b/E.d.b.b.
Part-winding
Liquid injection is used to protect the compressor, and in fact decreases
the discharge temperature. Operation is Similar to the economizer
function, with the difference that the expanded liquid is not sent to a
heat exchanger, but rather directly into the compressor. The function is
only activated when the compressor is on and the discharge temperature
exceeds a set threshold (with differential).
Delta
Star-line delay
Delay
Start-delta
delay
Fig. 6.t
6.4.5
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6
compressors.
Safety times
pRack PR300T can manage common safety times for each compressor:
• Minimum on time
• Minimum off time
• Minimum time between consecutive starts
6.4.9
The related parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
Note: for two lines, a further delay can be set between starts of the
compressors on different lines, so as to avoid Simultaneous starts. See
paragraph 6.6.6 for the detailed description of the synchronisation
function for two lines (DSS).
The minimum ON time is always considered, with the exception of when
an alarm is activated that is configured to stop the compressoror
6.4.6
Manual operation
pRack PR300T can manage 3 different compressor manual operating
modes:
• Enabling / disabling
• Manual management
• Output test
Enabling / disabling is managed in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f., while
manual management and the output test can be activated in main menu
branch B.b or B.c.
Enabling / disabling is used to temporarily exclude the compressors from
operation, to allow, for example, repair or replacement. The disabled
compressors are also excluded from rotation.
Balancing
Note: enabling is the only compressor manual operating mode
that can be activated when the unit is on.
pRack PR300T can control any balance valves in parallel with the
compressors.
This function can be used to activate a communicating solenoid valve
between compressor suction and discharge, for a set time, before each
individual compressor starts. In this way, the suction and discharge
pressure can be balanced and the compressor can be started in more
favourable conditions.
Both manual management and the output test are enabled by parameter
and remain active for a set time after the last button is pressed, after
which the unit returns to normal operating mode.
Manual management is used to switch the compressors on or off
without observing the control needs, however still considering any safety
devices (alarms, safety times, starting procedures) and respecting the set
configuration of the inputs/outputs.
The balancing function can be enabled and the related activation time
set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
38
ENG
Fixed cycle time
The compressor ON time is calculated as the percentage of the cycle time
corresponding to the required capacity:
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used
to override the outputs relating to the operation of the selected device,
e.g. compressor 1:
TON= % Richiesta * Tempo di ciclo
The cycle time can be set to the optimum value suggested by the
manufacturer to achieve maximum COP, or to a higher value to increase
resolution of the capacity delivered (a higher cycle time implies greater
continuity in the effective capacity that can be delivered).
Variable cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated
based on the required capacity:
Fig. 6.u
The output test is used to activate or deactivate the outputs (where
necessary setting an output percentage for the analogue outputs),
without observing any type of safety feature.
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used
to override the outputs on the pRack boards, in the order they physically
appear on the board (without links to the devices):
TCICLO= TON /% Richiesta
Optimised cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated
based on the required capacity for capacities less than 17 %, after which
the cycle time is set to 12 s and the ON time varies. In essence, this mode
is a combination of the previous two. This guarantees the maximum
possible COP and control rate (obtained with the 12 s cycle time) and the
maximum control range (starting from 10 %).
Note: the minimum capacity that can be delivered by Digital
Scroll™ compressors is Minimum ON time/Maximum cycle time = 2/30 =
6.7 %, which also depends on the selected control mode (for example, in
the first case shown in the figure the minimum capacity delivered is
Minimum ON time/Cycle time = 2/15 = 13%).
Fig. 6.v
Important: manual mode and the output test can only be
activated with the unit off.
Both manual mode and above all the output test must be used with
special care and by expert personnel to avoid damage to the devices.
Note: if high pressure prevention is enabled with activation/
deactivation of the devices, the Digital Scroll™ compressor delivers the
minimum possible capacity.
Digital Scroll™ compressors
pRack PR300T can use a Digital Scroll™ compressorä as the modulating
device for suction lines (one for each line). This type of compressor
features special operation, and is controlled by pRack PR300T as follows.
Starting procedure
pRack PR300T can manage the specific starting procedure for Digital
Scroll™ compressors, as represented as in the following figure:
The related parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. The
capacity is modulated by opening/closing a valve with PWM; when the
valve is ON the compressor delivers minimum capacity, while when the
valve is off the compressor delivers maximum capacity. In the following
description and figure, ON and OFF refer to the status of the compressor,
while operation of the valve is the exact opposite:
4s
10%
60s
50s
100s
Request
Valve
Compressor power request
Compressor PWM
modulation
180s
Compressor
67%
Startup
Fixed cycle time
ON
OFF 2s
13s
10s
15s
15s
Fig. 6.x
There are three stages:
5s
1. balance: the PWM valve is activated for 4 s, so that the compressor
delivers minimum capacity;
2. compressor activation with 50 % capacity for 3 minutes;
3. forced operation at 100 % for 1 minute.
Variable cycle time
ON
OFF 2s
18s
8s 5s
20s
time
During the starting procedure, the request sent by the controller is
ignored and only at the end of the procedure does the capacity delivered
start reflecting the request. If the request is cancelled during the starting
procedure, the compressor stops at the end, then the minimum ON time
for these types of compressors is set to 244 s.
4s
12s
Fig. 6.w
The following data are provided by the manufacturer of the compressor:
The starting procedure is performed when the compressor is started, while
it can be disabled for a set time by parameter for subsequent starts, if the
compressor has not remained off for a minimum set time. After this time
has elapsed the procedure is performed again during the following start.
• minimum ON time 2 s
• maximum cycle time 20 s
• optimum cycle time 12 s
There are three possible operating modes:
• Fixed cycle time
• Variable cycle time
• Optimised cycle time
Note: the safety times for Digital Scroll™ compressors are
established by the manufacturer, and are as follows:
• Minimum ON time: 244 s (starting procedure)
• Minimum OFF time: 180 s
• Minimum time between restarts: 360 s
Based on the operating mode selected, pRack PR300T calculates the
valve activation percentage that satisfies the required capacity.
39
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Example 2: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
Alarms
pRack PR300T can manage, in addition to the common alarms for all
types of compressors (see chapter 8 for details), some specific alarms for
Digital Scroll™ compressors:
• high oil temperature
• oil dilution
• high discharge temperature
These alarms are managed as specified by the manufacturer of the
compressor, and therefore pRack PR300T can only enable or disable them.
Activation of these alarms requires an oil temperature probe, which
can also be the common probe (see the paragraph relating to oil
management) and the compressor discharge temperature probe.
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min output
value = 0 V
Min capacity = 60 %
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Note: pRack PR300T does not manages the envelope for Digital
Scroll™ compressors and consequently there is no corresponding alarm
when operating outside the envelope.
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.z
Example 3: minimum modulating output value 2 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
6.5 Gas cooler
Analog output
pRack pR300T manages the gas cooler in a manner that is completely
similar to the pRack PR300T for the condensers, with the only difference
being that in transcritical conditions, as there is no longer correspondence
between pressure and saturated temperature, temperature control is
active by default, but starting from version 3.1.5, pressure control is also
available for the fans. The regulation variable, therefore, is the output
temperature from the gas cooler.
Up to 16 fans can be managed, also with inverter modulation. In the
event of modulation, the modulating output 0...10 V is unique while an
input can be managed for each fan for signalling the alarms.
The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set
from main menu branch D.a.
6.5.1
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min capacity = 60 %
Min output
value = 2 V
Setpoint
Differential
Control
Cut-off
pRack PR300T manages a control cut-off for the fans; functions and
related parameter settings can be enabled from main menu branch
D.a.b/D.b.b. The operating principle of the cut-off function is shown in
the figure:
Fan operation depending on the compressors
The operation of the fans can be bound to the operation of the
compressors by setting a parameter in main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b, in
this case the fans only start if at least one compressor is on. This setting is
ignored if the fans are controlled by a dedicated pRack PR300T board and
the pLAN network is disconnected.
Max output
value
Min output
value
Cut-Off
setpoint
Differential
Regulation
probe value
A percentage of the control request and a cut-off set point can be set.
When the control request reaches the set cut-off value, this value is kept
constant until the control value falls below the cut-off set point, after
which it falls to 0 % and remains there until the request exceeds the cutoff value again.
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min capacity = 0 %
Min output
value = 0 V
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.y
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Regulation setpoint
Differential
Fig. 6.ab
Example 1: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 0 %, maximum 100 %.
Differential
Regulation request
Cut-Off value
of request
Fan operation with modulating device
If the fans are controlled by a modulating device, the meaning of the
parameters that associate the minimum and maximum values of the
device’s modulating output and the minimum and maximum capacity of
the modulating device on screens Dag02 and Dbg02 is illustrated in the
following examples.
Differential
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.aa
pRack PR300T can manage proportional band and Neutral zone control,
by pressure or temperature.
For details on the control modes, see the corresponding paragraph, while
below is the description only of the features relating to the fans.
Setpoint
Differential
40
ENG
6.5.2
Rotation
If there is more than one inverter driven fan, as well as being able to
use an alarm digital input for each, it is assumed that the weight of the
modulating device is proportional to the number of fans, therefore the
first case is applied, as described previously: fans all with the same power
and modulating device power variation range greater than or equal to
the capacity of the other devices.
pRack PR300T can manage rotation of the fans, much in the same way as
described for the compressors, therefore:
• LIFO, FIFO, time, Custom rotation
• Management of a modulation device on each line
The substantial difference compared to the compressors concerns
the possibility to manage different capacities and load stages, which
are obviously not featured for the fans. In addition, pRack PR300T can
specially manage inverter driven fans. In fact, a multiple number of
inverter driven fans can be set.
If there is more than one fan, however the number of inverter driven fans
is set to 1, the fans are started and stopped at the same time, and the
fans will always all be at the same power.
Example 1: 4 fans all controlled by the same inverter correspond to
1 fan with four times the power.
Note: some fans can be excluded from the rotation, for example in
the winter; to do this use the split condenser function.
The table shows some examples of fan configurations on pRack300T, based on the number of fixed and variable-speed fans in the system.
Inverter
N. fans mng
(Condensing/
Advanced): number
of fans connected to
the 1st modulating
0-10V signal
Fan1
Overload
Fan2
Overload
Fan3
Overload
Fan1
Overload
Fan2
Overload
Fan3
Overload
Changed
Backward
compatibility
VERS >=4.0.1
CASE
VERS.<=3.2.8
N. fans (Wizard or
Condensing/Config):
number of fans
physically present
on the unit
0
NO
3
N.O.
OFF F1
OFF F2
OFF F3
OFF F1
OFF F2
OFF F3
NO
OK
1 YES
1
1
ONLY F1
warning,
no actions
N.O.
N.O.
OFF F1
AOUT
F1=0
N.O.
N.O.
OK,
fix of the
YES fixed a
claim
problem
2 YES
1
3
ONLY F1
ONLY F2
ONLY F3
ONLY F1
ONLY F2
ONLY F3
config.
warning, warning, warning, warning, warning, warning, suggested NO
no actions no actions no actions no actions no actions no actions by Carel
3A YES
3
1
ONLY F1
warning,
no actions
OFF F2
OFF F3
OFF F1
AOUT
F1=0
OFF F2
OFF F3
3B YES
3
1
ONLY F1
warning,
no actions
OFF F2
OFF F3
OFF F1
AOUT
F1=0
OFF F2
OFF F3
(1*)
OK,
YES fixed a
problem
4A YES
3
3
ONLY F1
warning,
no actions
OFF F2
OFF F3
ONLY F1
warning,
no actions
OFF F2
OFF F3
(2*)
NO
OK
4B YES
3
3
ONLY F1
WARNING,
NO
ACTIONS
OFF F2
OFF F3
ONLY F1
WARNING,
NO
ACTIONS
OFF F2
OFF F3
(3*)
NO
OK
Diagram
Notes
OK
OK,
YES fixed a
problem
Tab. 6.d
(1*) = PAY ATTENTION: for this config., fan 1 overload alarm forces off ALL the other fans. WORKAROUND: don't configure fan 1 overload but inverter warning
(2*) = CONFIGURATION NOT SUGGESTED BY CAREL. Some extra fan overload digital inputs (in the example fan 4 and fan 5 overload) will be available for the fans linked to the 0-10V signal
(in the example F1.4 and F1.5) and will follow the behaviour of the first fan (warning only).
(3*) = CONFIGURATION NOT SUPPORTED. Some extra fan overload digital inputs (in the example fan 4 and fan 5 overload) but these don't have to be configured. NOTE: A wrong calculation
for the 0-10V signal is provided
41
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Fast start (speed up)
6.6 HPV valve management
pRack PR300T can manage the fast start function (speed up), used to
overcome the initial inertia of the fans. The function can be enabled
and the related parameters set in main menu branch D.a.g If speed up is
enabled, a start time can be set in which the fan speed is forced to 100%.
If the outside temperature sensor is used, moreover, a threshold can be
set (with reset differential) below which speed up is disabled, so as to not
drastically lower the condensing pressure at start-up.
Management of the HPV valves, which separates the high pressure part of
the system from the medium pressure part, determines the transcritical
and subcritical operation mode of the unit. In transcritical mode, valve
regulation is done to obtain maximum yield while in subcritical mode,
regulation controls the subcooling. The HPV valve has a proportional +
integral (PI) type of regulation which uses an optimal pressure value of
the gas cooler calculated on the basis of the gas cooler pressure and
temperature as a regulation setpoint, as described hereafter. Enabling
HPV valve management coincides with enabling the transcritical system
management mode. The HPV valve can be managed directly by pRack
pR300T with built-in driver (PRK30TD***) or with external EVD EVO driver.
Both solutions are compatible with the majority of valves available on
the market. Direct control via serial connection is enabled under EEVS
(electronic expansion valve settings), accessible from the main menu,
branch E.i.c. The configuration parameters, on the other hand, are
accessible from the main menu, branch E.i. The algorithm for calculating
the regulation setpoint of the HPV valve can be optimized or customized
by the user according to what was set by the parameter.
Note: speed up has lower priority than the Silencer function (see
the following paragraph for the details), therefore if the Silencer
function is active, this is disabled.
Silencer
pRack PR300T can manage the Silencer function, used to limit fan speed
at certain times of the day or in specific conditions, enabled by digital
input.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch D.a.g.
Calculation of the optimized setpoint
The calculation of the optimized setpoint is illustrated in the figure.
Enabling fan speed limitation from the digital input or based on time
bands is independent, consequently the speed is limited to the set value
when at least one of the two conditions is active.
Up to 4 activation bands can be set for each day of the week.
Split condenser
Pressure (Bar)
pRack PR300T can manage the possibility to exclude some fans from
operation, for example to reduce gas cooler operation in winter, using
the split condenser function.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch D.a.g.
Split condenser can be used to exclude from rotation fans whose index is:
• even
• odd
• higher than a settable value
• lower than a settable value
The function can be activated by:
T₂₃
C
B
INTERMEDIATE ZONE
SUBCRITICAL ZONE
D
Fig. 6.ac
The HPV valve is managed according to the zone identified based on the
output temperature and gas cooler pressure.
In order to define the zones, it is necessary to set the two pressure values
P100% and Pmax, the two temperatures T12, T23 related to points B and C in
the figure and the two temperatures Tmin and T100%.
In the following, with Tgc and Pgc, the temperature and pressure of the gas
cooler will be indicated.
The behaviour of the HPV valve in the various zones is as follows:
• Transcritical zone, identified by Tgc ≥ T12 and Pgc ≤ Pmax: the valve works
with proportional + integral (PI) type integration in order to maintain
the maximum COP given by the optimal pressure Popt calculated as a
function of the output temperature from the gas cooler Togc.
• Subcritical zone, identified by Tmin ≤ Tgc ≤ T23: the valve works with PI
regulation in order to maintain constant subcooling.
• Transition zone, identified by T23 ≤ Tgc ≤ T12: the valve works with PI
regulation with a pressure setpoint identified as the conjunction of
points B and C in the figure, obtained by calculating the optimal pressure
at the limit of the transcritical and subcritical zones. The purpose of this
zone is to avoid discontinuity in passing between the two zones.
• Upper proportional zone, defined by Pmax< Pgc< P100%: the valve works
with only proportional regulation between the opening value reached
at pressure Pmax and the maximum opening value at pressure P100%. If
the pressure decreases, the opening value of the HPV valve remains
constant until it enters the transcritical zone, in which the regulation
restarts as previously described.
Manual operation
pRack PR300T can also manage the same three manual operating modes
for the fans as described for the compressors:
• Enabling
• Manual management
• Output test
Enabling is managed in main menu branch D.a.f/D.b.f., while manual
management and the output test can be activated in main menu branch
B.b or B.c. For the detailed description of the three modes, see paragr. 6.3.9.
Alarms
pRack PR300T can manage both a common alarm for the fans and
separate alarms for each fan.
When the common alarm is active the alarm is signalled, but no fan
is stopped, while for separate alarms the fan that the alarm refers to is
stopped.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
TRANSCRITICAL ZONE
T₁₂
Enthalpy (KJ/Kg)
Note:
• the split condenser function can be disabled by parameter if the high
pressure prevention function is activated. If split condenser is disabled
due to activation of the high pressure prevention function, it remains
disabled for a set time, after which it is reactivated.
• split condenser cannot be enabled if there is a speed modulation
device that controls all the fans.
6.5.7
P₁₀₀%
Pmax
HPV CLOSING ZONE
• time bands (winter/summer seasons)
• digital input
• supervisor
• outside temperature (set threshold and differential)
6.5.6
LOWER PROPORTIONAL ZONE
A
Tmin
6.5.5
UPPER PROPORTIONAL ZONE
HPV OPENING ZONE
6.5.4
T₁₀₀%
6.5.3
42
ENG
• Lower proportional zone, defined by T100%< Tgc< Tmin: the valve works
with only proportional regulation between the opening value reached
at temperature Tmin and the maximum opening value at temperature
T100%. If the pressure increases, the opening value of the HPV valve
remains constant until it enters the subcritical zone, in which the
regulation restarts as previously described. It is possible to disable
operation according to this mode by parameter.
On the other hand, if the pressure in the receiver goes above the
maximum work pressure set, the dynamic calculated setpoint for the HPV
valve can be changed in order to decrease the pressure in the receiver.
An offset in proportion to the distance from the maximum threshold is
added to the calculated setpoint so that the lesser opening of the HPV
valve contributes to decreasing the pressure in the receiver. The offset is
directly proportional to the distance from the maximum work threshold,
as illustrated in the figure:
Calculation of the customized setpoint (custom)
The customized calculation differs from the optimized control due to
the fact that the curve in the subcritical phase is rectilinear and defined
by the user, therefore the definition of the bands and the calculation of
the setpoint can be customized by the user. Behaviour in the remaining
bands is as described for the optimized algorithm.
Setpoint HPV
OFFS
HPV valve accessory functions
HPV valve management includes some accessory functions:
• Pre-positioning: entering the unit ON status, the HPV valve remains at
a fixed position that can be set by a parameter for a fixed time, which
is also settable by a parameter, in order to be able to quickly raise the
pressure in the tank. This procedure is reactivated whenever the unit
goes into the OFF status or the HPV valve moves into the minimum
position due to all of the compressors being turned off (optional).
• Valve closure with compressors off: if all compressors in the medium
temperature unit are turned off, the HPV valve can be positioned
at the minimum opening value in the OFF status, which can be set
by a parameter. When a compressor is restarted, the valve restarts
the regulation with the pre-positioning procedure described in the
previous point.
• Minimum and maximum opening values: the minimum opening
value in Off status and in ON status can be differentiated (by keypad,
digital input or supervisor) which the maximum opening value is
unique.
• Maximum percentage variation: the movement of the valve cannot
exceed the maximum set percentage variation per second.
• Filter on setpoint: the calculation of the regulation setpoint of the
HPV valve can be done by taking into account the averages of the
last n samples (maximum 99) to avoid sudden variations due to high
variability of the output temperature of the gas cooler.
• Minimum setpoint: a minimum value can be set for the HPV valve
setpoint, below which the setpoint can never go regardless of
the parameters entered, in order to preserve the operation of the
compressors.
• Setpoint distance alarm: if the gas cooler pressure is too far from the
calculated setpoint for too long (threshold and delay can be set), an
alarm can be triggered.
6.6.8
Fig. 6.ae
6.6.9
Summary of inputs, outputs and HPV valve par.
The following is a summary table of the inputs/outputs used and the
parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For
details, refer to Appendix A.1.
Summary of inputs/outputs and HPV valve parameters
Analog inputs
Digital inputs
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
Mask
Description
Bab04, Daa39 Gas cooler pressure
Bab61, Daa43 Gas cooler output temperature
Bab09, Daa40 Gas cooler backup pressure
Bab62, Daa44 Gas cooler output backup temperature
Baade, Eia04 HPV valve alarm
Bad14, Eia06 HPV valve output
-----
Parameters
Settings
Eib01
Zone
definition
Eib05
ControlofthereceiverpressurethroughtheHPVvalve
If the pressure in the receiver goes below the minimum work pressure
set, the dynamic calculated setpoint for the HPV valve can be changed in
order to increase the pressure in the receiver.
Eib06
An offset in proportion to the distance from the minimum threshold is
subtracted from the calculated setpoint so that the greater opening of
the HPV valve contributes to increasing the pressure in the receiver.
Regulation
Eib07
The offset is directly proportional to the distance from the minimum
work threshold, as illustrated in the figure:
Eib16
Setpoint HPV
OFF. MAX
Safeties
Eib02
Eib03
Eib08
Eib09
Pmin
PREC max
PREC
Prec min
Fig. 6.ad
Eib10
43
HPV valve management enabled, or transcritical operation
mode enabled
Selecting the type of algorithm to apply to the calculation
of the pressure setpoint
P100% upper pressure limit
Pmax pressure for defining the upper proportional zone
Pcritic optimal pressure calculated at the passage
temperature between the intermediate zone and
transcritical zone
T12 temperature limit between the transcritical zone and
intermediate zone
T23 temperature limit between the intermediate zone and
subcritical zone
Tmin temperature for defining the lower proportional zone
T100% temperature for defining the complete opening zone
of the valve
Subcooling delta for optimized regulation
Coefficient for determining the customized line
Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation
of the HPV valve
Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of
the HPV valve
Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation
of the HPV valve with heat recovery
Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of
the HPV valve with heat recovery
Enabling the regulation of the gas cooler in the subcritical
zone
Min. opening of the HPV valve with the unit OFF
Min. opening of the HPV valve with the unit ON
Opening of the HPV valve at start-up during prepositioning
Pre-positioning duration
Enabling of the filter action on the HPV valve setpoint
Number of samples
Enabling of different management of the HPV valve during
heat recovery activation
Setpoint regulation of the HPV valve during heat recovery
Time scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat
recovery
Pressure scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat
recovery
HPV valve safety position
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Safeties
Eib11
Eib12
Eib13
Eib14
Eib15
Eib17
Eib32
Eib28
Summary of inputs/outputs and RPRV valve parameters
Offset to be applied to the external temperature in the
event of gas cooler temperature probe error
HPV valve safety procedure enabling
Receiver high pressure threshold
Maximum allowed receiver pressure
Maximum offset to add to the HPV setpoint when the
receiver pressure exceeds the high pressure threshold
Receiver low pressure threshold
Minimum allowed receiver pressure
Maximum offset to subtract from the HPV setpoint
when the receiver pressure goes below the low pressure
threshold
Enable HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1
are off
Delay HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1
are off
Enable warning function when the gas cooler pressure is
too far from the setpoint for the set time
Difference between the gas cooler pressure and the
setpoint which generates the warning
Delay time before generating the warning
Maximum opening of the HPV valve
Maximum variation per second allowed for the HPV valve
output
Minimum HPV valve regulation setpoint
Enable low temp. control (lower proportional zone)
Mask
Description
Bab66, Eia01 RPRV receiver pressure probe
Baadf, Eia05 RPRV valve alarm
Bad15, Eia07 RPRV valve output
-----
Analog inputs
Digital inputs
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
Parameters
Settings
Eib18
Regulation
Eib22
Enable RPRV valve management
Regulation setpoint for the CO2 receiver pressure
Proportional gain for the proportional + integral
regulation of the RPRV valve
Integral time for the proportional + integral
regulation of the RPRV valve
Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the
unit OFF
Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the
unit ON
Opening of the RPRV valve at start-up during
pre-positioning
Pre-positioning duration
Maximum opening of the RPRV valve
Maximum variation per second allowed for the
RPRV valve output
HPV valve safety position
Enable RPRV valve closure when all compressors
on line 1 are off
RPRV valve closure delay when all compressors
on line 1 are off
Receiver high pressure threshold alarm
Receiver high pressure differential alarm
Receiver high pressure alarm delay
Receiver high pressure alarm reset type
Enable compressor shutoff with receiver high
pressure alarm
Eib19
Eib20
Eib21
Safeties
Eib23
Eib24
6.7 RPRV valve management
Management of the RPRV valve, which is a PI regulation, is to maintain the
pressure inside the CO2 receiver equal to the setpoint. The RPRV valve can
be managed directly by pRack pR300T with built-in driver (PRK30TD***)
or with external EVD EVO driver. Both solutions are compatible with
the majority of valves available on the market. Direct control via serial
connection is enabled under EEVS (electronic expansion valve settings),
accessible from the main menu, branch E.i.c. The configuration parameters,
on the other hand, are accessible from the main menu, branch E.i.
6.7.1
Eib25
Tab. 6.e
6.7.3
RPRV valve accessory functions
RPRV valve management includes some accessory functions:
• Pre-positioning: entering the unit ON status, the RPRV valve remains
at a fixed position that can be set by a parameter for a fixed time, also
settable by a parameter, in order to be able to quickly raise the pressure
in the tank. This procedure is reactivated whenever the unit goes into
the OFF status or the RPRV valve moves into the minimum position
due to all of the compressors being turned off (optional).
• Valve closure with compressors off: if all compressors in the medium
temperature unit are turned off, the RPRV valve can be positioned
at the minimum opening value in the OFF status, which can be set
by a parameter. When a compressor is restarted, the valve restarts
the regulation with the pre-positioning procedure described in the
previous point.
• Minimum and maximum opening values: the minimum opening
value in Off status and in ON status can be differentiated (by keypad,
digital input or supervisor) while the maximum opening value is
unique.
• Maximum percentage variation: the movement of the valve cannot
exceed the maximum set percentage variation per second.
• Maximum receiver pressure: a maximum value can be set for
the receiver pressure, above which an alarm is triggered and unit
operation can be blocked. The block is optional and can be enabled
by a parameter.
6.7.2
Updated HPV and CCMT valve list
From pRack300T SW version 4.1.0 in combination with EVDevo FW
version 7.8/7.9 (or higher), all of the CCM and CCMT valves are managed
and selectable individually. CCMT valves are also available as both HPV
and RPRV valves. Up to pRack300T SW version 4.0.2 (or lower EVDevo FW),
the choice of non-Carel CCMT valves was only possible for CCMT 2-4-6
models. For higher models, the “custom” valve setting was required, with
the characteristic values entered manually.
6.8 Intercooler
pRack pR300T manages the gas cooler much the same way as pRack
PR300 does for the condensers on a second condenser line, and activation
is only available via the Wizard:
Summary of inputs, outputs and RPRV valve
parameters
Only temperature control is available. The control variable is therefore
the intercooler outlet temperature (measured by the probe, and not a
converted pressure value).
The following is a summary table of the inputs/outputs used and the
parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For
details, refer to Chapter 6 and Appendix A.1.
Request
100.0%
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Fig. 6.af
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
44
Intercooler temperature
ENG
If the intercooler temperature probe is faulty or not fitted, the compressor
discharge temperature on the low temperature line (L2) can be used,
where configured. If, on the other hand, the low temperature compressor
discharge temperature probe (L2) is not fitted or has an alarm, the
controller can use the value converted from the suction pressure on
the medium temperature line (L1). The fans can also be managed with
modulating operation by inverter; in this case, there is only one 0 to 10
V modulating output, while a different input can be used for each fan as
regards the alarm signal. The function can be enabled and the related
parameters set from main menu branch D.b. The intercooler can be
configured only if the second suction line is available (therefore on the
pLAN 1 boards, if the double suction line is managed using one board, or
pLAN 2 boards if the double suction line is managed using two boards).
Digital Input
ex.: day/night
Summer/Winter
Setpoint
User setpoint +0,5 barg
time
Fig. 6.ag
The following functions are not available for the second line of fans
(intercooler)::
• floating condensing;
• set point compensation;
• chillbooster;
• heat recovery;
• backup pressure probes;
• split condenser.
Note: the same digital input is used for set point compensation on
each line, so if suction and condensing pressure set point
compensation is activated by digital input, both compensation functions
are active at the same time.
If compensation from analogue input is enabled, a offset that is linearly
variable to the value read by a dedicated probe can be applied to the
suction pressure set point, as shown in the figure.
The pressure prevent function will be managed as configured on screen
Gbb07:
Offset
Offset max
Offset min
Probe value
Selecting NO means the low temperature line discharge pressure (L2)
needs to be configured for managing the PREVENT function, otherwise
PREVENT will not be activated. If the field is set to YES, the PREVENT function
will work using the medium temperature line suction pressure (L1).
Lower value
Fig. 6.ah
Compensation from analogue input applies to setpoint:
• suction
• gas cooler
• HPV minimum.
These compensations can be enabled separately.
6.9 Energy saving
pRack PR300T can activate energy saving functions by adjusting the
suction and condensing pressure set points. The suction and condensing
pressure set points can be applied with two different offsets, one for the
closing period and one for the winter period, activated by:
• Digital input
• Time band
• Supervisor
6.9.2
Floating suction set point
For the suction line, the floating set point is managed by the supervisor.
The suction pressure set point set by the user is changed by the supervisor
in range between a settable minimum and maximum. The operation is
illustrated in the following figure:
In addition, the suction pressure set point can be modified from analogue
input, applying a linearly variable offset based on the value read by a
probe. As well as set point compensation from digital input, scheduler,
supervisor or analogue input, two further energy saving functions
are available, floating suction and condensing pressure set point. The
functions can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch C.a.d/C.b.d and D.a.d/D.b.d.
6.9.1
Upper value
Floating setpoint
Max
Real variation
Max variation
Set point compensation
Min
Compensation from digital input, scheduler or supervisor is similar for suction
and condensing pressure set points, consequently the following description
applies to both. Two different offsets can be defined, which apply to:
• Closing periods, defined by the scheduler, activation of a digital input
or supervisor
• Winter period, defined by the scheduler
Sampling time
time
Fig. 6.ai
The two offsets add to the set point defined by the user when the
corresponding condition is active.
The set point is calculated by the supervisor and acquired by the pRack
PR300T controller at set intervals, the maximum variation allowed for the
set point in each sampling period can also be set; if the value acquired
differs from the previous value by more than the maximum variation
allowed, the variation is limited to the maximum value. If the supervisor is
disconnected, after 10 minutes (fixed) the pRack PR300T controller starts
decreasing the set point with variations equal to the maximum variation
allowed each sampling period, until reaching the minimum set point
allowed with floating suction pressure.
Example 1: closing offset 0.3 barg, winter offset 0.2 barg, suction
pressure compensation from scheduler and from digital input
activated. When the digital input is activated, for example with a day/
night function, 0.3 barg is added to the operating set point, and when the
winter period is in progress a further 0.2 barg is added. The operation can
be schematised in the following figure:
45
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Oil injection
An oil injection valve can be managed for each of the first 6 compressors
in each line as shown schematically for three compressors in Fig. 6.ah.
Valve activation is performed when the corresponding oil level digital
input is active. The valve is opened in intermittent mode with settable
opening and closing times, for a total time that is also settable. Once
exceeded, if the digital input is still active a low oil alarm is generated.
When the oil level digital input is not active, the valve is activated with
opening and closing times which can be set at a different value, in order
to allow the passage of a certain quantity of oil.
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and
maximum limits for the floating set point.
6.9.3
Floating condensing set point
For the condenser line, the floating set point is based on the outside
temperature. The floating condensing pressure set point is achieved by
adding a constant programmable value to the outside temperature and
limiting the resulting value between a settable minimum and maximum,
as shown in the figure:
6.11.2 Oil management per line
Floating setpoint
A solenoid valve can be managed which connects the oil separator to
the receiver based on the digital input reading of the oil level, which
can be only minimum level or minimum and maximum level. Separator,
receiver and valve are illustrated schematically in Fig. 5.a. If no oil level
input is present, the solenoid valve can still be activated by connecting
its operation to the status of the compressors. If only the minimum level
is present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs intermittently for the
entire time in which the minimum level is not active. The opening and
closing times of the valve during activation can be set by a parameter. If
the minimum level signal deactivates again, the valve remains deactivated
for at least a minimum set closure time, as shown in the figure:
Max
offset
Min
time
external temperature
Fig. 6.aj
Minimum off
time oil solenoid
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and
maximum limits for the floating set point.
Minimum oil
level active
Minimum oil
level not active
6.10 Accessory functions
pRack PR300T can manage several accessory functions. Of these, the
economizer and liquid injection have already been described in paragraph
6.3 on compressor operation, while the others are described below.
Common oil
solenoid ACTIVE
Common oil
solenoid
NOT ACTIVE
6.11 Oil management
Fig. 6.al
pRack pR300T allows some additional functionalities for oil management,
per individual compressor or per line:
• Individual compressor: oil cooling, oil injection.
• Line: common oil receiver
The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set
from main menu branch E.a.a/E.a.b.
Gestione olio comune
da livello minimo
NOT ACTIVE
MIN
6.11.1 Individual compressor oil management
ACTIVE
Oil cooler
An oil cooler can be managed for the first 6 compressors in line 1, in order
to keep the oil temperature under constant control. For each compressor,
based on the value read by the oil temperature probe, an oil cooler digital
output can be activated with a settable threshold and differential, as
shown in the figure.
OPEN
CLOSE
Fig. 6.am
Oil cooler
If two levels are present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs when the
maximum level is activated and remains activated in intermittent mode,
with settable opening and closing times, for the entire time in which the
minimum level is not active. If the minimum level signal is activated, the
valve remains deactivated until the maximum level is reactivated again,
as shown in the figure:
Oil temperature
Differential
Setpoint
Fig. 6.ak
For each compressor, two alarms can also be managed for high or low oil
temperature, setting the threshold, differential and delay.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
46
ENG
6.11.3 Summary of inputs, outputs and oil parameters
Minimum oil
level active
Minimum oil
level not active
The following are summary tables of the inputs/outputs used and the
parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For
details, refer to Appendix A.1.
Maximum oil
level active
Summary of inputs/outputs and oil cooling parameters
Mask
Description
Bab41, Eaaa05 Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 1
Bab42, Eaaa06 Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 1
Bab43, Eaaa07 Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 1
Analog inputs Bab44, Eaaa08 Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 1
Bab45, Eaaa09 Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 1
Bab46, Eaaa10 Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 1
Digital inputs
----Analog outputs ----Eaaa16
Oil cooling compressor 1 line 1
Eaaa19
Oil cooling compressor 2 line 1
Eaaa22
Oil cooling compressor 3 line 1
Digital outputs
Eaaa25
Oil cooling compressor 4 line 1
Eaaa28
Oil cooling compressor 5 line 1
Eaaa31
Oil cooling compressor 6 line 1
Enable oil cooling compressors (line 1)
Eaab15
Oil cooling functioning only when compressor
functioning
Oil temperature setpoint (line 1)
Oil temperature differential (line 1)
Eaab08
Fan startup time in case of oil probe error (line 1)
Parameters
Fan shutdown time in case of oil probe error (line 1)
Oil cooler high temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Eaab16
Oil cooler high temperature alarm differential (line 1)
Oil cooler high temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Oil cooler low temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Eaab20
Oil cooler low temperat. alarm differential (line 1)
Oil cooler low temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Maximum oil
level not active
Common oil
solenoid ACTIVE
Common oil solenoid
NOT ACTIVE
Fig. 6.an
Gestione olio comune
da livello minimo e massimo
ACTIVE
MAX
NOT ACTIVE
NOT ACTIVE
MIN
ACTIVE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
Tab. 6.f
Summary of inputs/outputs and oil injection parameters
Fig. 6.ao
If no oil level input is present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs
intermittently for the entire time in which at least one compressor is
active. The opening and closing times of the valve during activation can
be set by a parameter. In any case, if the pressure difference between
the oil receiver and suction is less than a settable threshold for at least
a settable time, the solenoid can be forced in intermittent mode with
settable times. It is also possible to set different delay times, to be applied
during normal operation, or when the pressure difference exceeds the
threshold, in order to ensure pressurization of the receiver.
Analog inputs
Digital inputs
Common oil management based on differential pressure
pR300T also offers the possibility to configure an oil receiver pressure
probe, directly from the "Inputs/Outputs" menu:
Inputs/Outputs Æ Status Æ Analog Inputs Æ Screen Bab63
Analog outputs
as well as a digital output for the oil reservoir, again at the same path:
Inputs/Outputs ÆStatus Æ Digital Outputs Æ Screen Bac71
Digital outputs
This will manage the solenoid valve placed between the oil separator and
receiver. Once these two I/Os have been enabled, a pressure differential
threshold can be set between the oil receiver pressure and the suction
line pressure, from the "Other functions" menu:
Other functions Æ Oil Æ Settings Æ Screen Eaab14
Mask
Bab62
Bab66
Eaaa57
Eaaa58
Eaaa59
Eaaa60
Eaaa61
Eaaa62
Eaba17
Eaba18
Eaba19
Eaba20
Eaba21
Eaba22
--Eaaa40
Eaaa41
Eaaa42
Eaaa43
Eaaa44
Eaaa45
Eaba40
Eaba41
Eaba42
Eaba43
Eaba44
Eaba45
Eaab10
If the difference between the two pressure values is less than the
threshold, the pR300T will open the pressurising solenoid valve between
the separator and receiver. This activation may be delayed by a settable
value in seconds. The valve will be closed immediately once the correct
difference between the two pressure values has been restored.e correct
difference between the two pressure values has been restored.
Parameters
Eaab11
Eabb10
Parameters
Eabb11
Description
Oil differential pressure probe 1 line 1
Oil differential pressure probe 1 line 2
Oil level compressor 1 line 1
Oil level compressor 2 line 1
Oil level compressor 3 line 1
Oil level compressor 4 line 1
Oil level compressor 5 line 1
Oil level compressor 6 line 1
Oil level compressor 1 line 2
Oil level compressor 2 line 2
Oil level compressor 3 line 2
Oil level compressor 4 line 2
Oil level compressor 5 line 2
Oil level compressor 6 line 2
--Oil level valve compressor 1 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 6 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 1 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 6 line 2
Enable oil level management (line 1)
Number of compressor alarms associated
with the oil level (line 1)
Oil level valve opening time (line 1)
Oil level valve closing time (line 1)
Delay for oil level valve pulsing at startup
(line 1)
Maximum pulsing time for the oil level
valve (line 1)
Enable oil level management (line 2)
Number of compressor alarms associated
to the oil level (line 2)
Oil level valve opening time (line 2)
Oil level valve closing time (line 2)
Delay for oil level valve pulsing at startup
(line 2)
Maximum pulsing time for the oil level
valve (line 2)
Tab. 6.g
Summary of inputs/outputs and oil receiver level parameters
47
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Analog inputs
Digital inputs
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
Parameters
differential.
Mask
Bab63
Bab65
----Bac71
Baceo
Description
Oil separator differential pressure probe line 1
Oil separator differential pressure probe line 2
----Oil separator line 1
Oil separator line 2
Type of oil level separator control: with minimum
level only, with minimum and maximum level
Eaab12 and with compressor status (line 1)
Minimum separator valve closing time (line 1)
Minimum oil level detection delay (line 1)
Valve opening time during oil level reset (line 1)
Valve closing time during oil level reset (line 1)
Eaab13
Valve opening time with correct oil level (line 1)
Valve closing time with correct oil level (line 1)
Oil receiver differential pressure threshold (line 1)
Eaab15 Oil receiver differential pressure (line 1)
Oil receiver differential pressure delay (line 1)
Digital output
1°C/°F
Threshold
Tcond. - Tliq.
Fig. 6.ap
In the second case, the output is active for liquid temperature values
greater than a threshold, with fixed differential.
Tab. 6.h
For integrated parallel compression (single compressor), when the
parallel compressor is active, the reference for calculating the delta will
no longer be more the medium temperature line compressor suction
pressure, but rather the (liquid) receiver pressure, which coincides with
the parallel compressor suction pressure. The changeover in reference
from suction to receiver pressure is automatic, and does not need to be
enabled. For parallel compression enabled via pLAN, the same I/Os (oil
receiver pressure probe and solenoid valve digital output) and the same
settings (delta and differential) can be used as seen above, or new I/Os
and new parameters can be set on the parallel compressor board (always
on screen Eaab25)
Digital output
1°C/°F
Threshold
Tliq.
Fig. 6.aq
The subcooling function can be enabled and the related parameters set
in main menu branch E.b.a/E.b.b.
Note: the subcooling function is active when at least one
compressor is on.
6.12 Subcooling
pRack PR300T can control subcooling in two different ways:
• with the condensing temperature and the liquid temperature
• with the liquid temperature only
In the first case, subcooling is calculated as the difference between
the condensing temperature (obtained by converting the condensing
pressure) and the liquid temperature measured after the exchanger.
The corresponding output is activated below a set threshold, with fixed
6.13 Heat recovery
THR1I
T
F
FHW
T
THR1O
THR2I T
3WHRI
FHW
T
THR2O
3WHR2
T
Tdisch
F
3WGC
T
HR1
Tdisch HR2
TGC
T
TING GC
HR2
T
TGC by passed
PGC
T
P
GAS cooler
HPV
ExV
Fig. 6.ar
pRack pR300T manages up to two heat recovery functions at the same time. The related parameters can be set from the main menu, branch E.e.a.b.01.
Activation and control of each heat recovery function will reflect the percentage of heat demand calculated based on one of the following:
• digital input
• temperature probe
• external analogue signal
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
48
ENG
• CFloating condensing without heat recovery: SP=Tout+ΔT (screen
In the last two cases, a digital input can still be used to enable the function.
Once active, heat recovery control can act on the HPV valve set point and
on the effective Gas Cooler set point, in both simultaneous mode (acting
on both at the same time) and in sequential mode, based on thresholds
(first acting on the HPV and then the Gas Cooler, when exceeding a
certain heat demand threshold):
• action on HPV set point (in barg/psig)
• action on GC set point °C/°F)
When acting on the HPV valve set point, the heat recovery function
modifies the “Minimum HPV valve control set point” parameter (screen
Eib28), whose default value is 40.0 barg and used as a lower limit for
calculating the dynamic pressure set point for controlling the high
pressure valve.
Dad06)
• Floating condensing during heat recovery (acting on GC):
SP=Tout+OffsetGC; where OffsetGC> ΔT
• As the last step of the heat recovery function, the Gas Cooler can be
bypassed when the following conditions are true:
• bypass is enabled (screen Eeab)
• the heat demand percentage exceeds a settable limit value (e.g. 90%)
• the bypassed gas temperature cooler is lower than a certain settable
limit value (e.g. 20°C)
When these conditions are true, the bypass valve will start modulating,
with its set point being calculated based on the bypassed Gas Cooler
temperature, until the Gas Cooler is completely bypassed when the
temperature allows.
Increasing this minimum set point from its default value (40.0 barg) to a
new minimum set point (e.g. 75.0 barg) causes the system to operate in
transcritical conditions, even when the Gas Cooler outlet temperature is
between Tmin and T23 (see the control parameters, screen Eib05); in this
zone, defined as subcritical, the HPV set point would be calculated based
on subcooling.
When heat recovery is deactivated, the HPV valve set point gradually
returns to the calculated value, over a settable time. The same is also true
for the condenser control set point.
This minimum set point can be increased further (screen Eeab28) in
proportion to the heat recovery demand, up to a settable maximum limit
value (e.g. 85.0 barg).
6.14 Generic functions
pRack pR300T allows the use of free inputs/outputs and some internal
variables for generic functions.
If the HPV valve set point calculated based on the Gas Cooler temperature
exceeds the minimum set point modified by the heat recovery function,
the controller will use the calculated set point.
Attention: generic functions are available on the pRack pR300T
boards with pLAN address from 1 to 4, or on all boards that manage
a suction or condensing line, however only the parameters related to the
functions managed by boards 1 and 2 are sent to the supervisor system.
Request (%)
100%
Min. request
activation
The generic functions available for each board are:
• 5 stages
• 2 modulations
• 2 alarms
• 1 scheduler
Each function can be enabled/disabled by digital input or user interface.
Heat
recovery
request
0%
Status (0-1)
The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set
from main menu branch E.f.
1
Heat
recovery
status
0
Pressure
(barg)
To be able to use the free inputs they must be configured as generic
probes from A to E (analog inputs) and generic inputs from F to J (digital
inputs), so a maximum of 5 analog and 5 digital inputs can be used.
After having configured the generic probes, the variables associated
with them can be used as regulation variables and the digital inputs
as enabling variables. Besides the probes and generic inputs, internal
variables in the pRack pR300T software can be used, which depend upon
the configuration of the system. Some examples, for analog variables, are:
• Suction pressure
• Gas cooler pressure
• Saturated suction temperature
• Gas cooler temperature
• Suction temperature
• Discharge temperature
• % of compressors active
• % of fans active
• Superheating
• Subcooling
• Liquid temperature
• % requested compressors
• % requested fans
85.0 barg Max HPV
set point (heat
recovery ON)
75.0 barg Min HPV
set point (heat
recovery ON)
40.0 barg Min HPV
set point (heat
recovery OFF)
Time
(*) Different activation's delays are not considered in this graph
Min.
set-point
HPV
Fig. 6.as
When acting on the on the Gas Cooler set point, the Gas Cooler fan
temperature set point can be increased gradually to the maximum limit.
This limit is equal to the maximum allowable set point (screen Dab06)
when operating in simultaneous mode, or the value set on screen Eeab29
in sequential mode.
for digital variables:
In simultaneous mode, the increase will start at the same time as the
action on the HPV valve set point, while in sequential mode the increase
will start after having exceeded a settable heat demand percentage limit
threshold (Eeab29).
• High suction pressure alarm
• Low suction pressure alarm
• High gas cooler pressure alarm
• Low gas cooler pressure alarm
• Sign of life
• Prevent active
If the floating condensing function is active (branch D.a.d), this can be
disabled when heat recovery is active (Eeab04), however if it is enabled
while heat recovery is active, the Gas Cooler set point increase can be
added directly to the outside temperature.
A unit of measure and description can be associated to each generic
function. The following shows the operation of 4 types of generic
functions.
49
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Stages
pRack pR300T can manage up to 5 stage functions, with either direct or
reverse operation.
In both cases a setpoint and differential can be set and the operation of
the related output is illustrated in the figure for both cases:
Direct stage
Diff.
Regulation variable
Diff.
Setpoint
Reverse stage
The type of PID control is completed by also setting the integral time and
derivative time parameters.
Diff.
Regulation variable
Diff.
Setpoint
Fig. 6.at
If an enabling value is set, the output connected to the stage is active if
the enabling is also active. For each stage, a high alarm and low alarm
threshold can be enabled and they are absolute. For each alarm, the
activation delay and priority can be set. See Chapter 8 for details on the
alarms. An example of using the generic stage functions may be the
activation of the fans on the room units based on the temperature.
- Proportional gain:
This indicates the percentage by which the output increases/decreases
to modify the control variable by one unit. The proportional gain
depends on the differential and is calculated as follows:
kp = 100.0/(2*differential)
Modulation
pRack pR300T can manage up to 2 modulation functions, with either
direct or reverse operation. In both cases a setpoint and differential can
be set and the operation of the related output is illustrated in the figure
for the direct mode, where the cut-off function is also enabled:
P = 100.0*Reg_Var/(2*diff ) -100.0*[(Setpoint-Diff )/(2*Diff )]
- Integral time:
The integral action has the task of returning the controlled variable to
the set point value if this remains constant (the proportional action
alone may cause the controlled variable to remain at a value other than
the set point).
The integral action works in addition to proportional action.
Direct modulation
MAX
E.g.: set point = 25.0°C, reg_var=28.0°C (error= 28.0-25.0 = 3.0), kp =
5%/°C, Ti = 60s.
MIN
(Cut-off
Value)
Hyster.
Setpoint
Cutoff differential Differential
Differential
output (t0 @0s) = kp*error= 5*3.0= 15.0%
output (t1 @30s) = kp*error + kp*error*(t1/Ti)= 15%+15%*30/60=
27.5%
output (t2 @60s) = kp*error + kp*error*(t2/Ti)= 15%+15%*60/60= 30%
output (t3 @120s) = kp*error + kp*error*(t3/Ti)= 15%+15%*120/60=
45.0%
Regulation variable
Fig. 6.au
[DEFAULT = 0s = disabled]
If an enabling value is set, the output connected to the stage is active if
the enabling is also active. For each modulation, a high alarm and low
alarm threshold can be enabled and they are absolute. For each alarm,
the activation delay and priority can be set. See Chapter 8 for details on
the alarms. For modulation, a minimum and maximum value can also
be set for the output and the cut-off function can be enabled, which
operates as shown in the previous figure.
- Derivative time:
The derivative time setting introduces an action that is proportional
to the rate of change of the error before it becomes significant
(proportional action) or persists for a certain period of time (integral
action). The derivative action anticipates the trend in the error.
[DEFAULT = 0s = disabled]
Generic functions
PID control on modulating function
After having chosen the corresponding variables, tye type of control can
be selected.
The type of PID control can be either DIRECT or REVERSE.
• In direct mode, the analogue output signal will increase proportionally
to an increase in the control variable value.
• In reverse mode, the analogue output signal will decrease
proportionally to a decrease in the control variable value.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Control with two variables
For both the thermostat functions and the modulating functions, the
possibility has been introduced to activate a digital output or modulate
an analogue output as the result of a mathematical operation on two
variables.
Example of control with one variable
50
ENG
Example of control with two variables
Hygiene procedure
To avoid water stagnation in the pipes, a hygiene procedure can be
enabled that activates ChillBooster every day for a set time, if the outside
temperature is greater than a threshold.
Note: if the outside temperature probe is not configured or is
configured but is not working, ChillBooster operates based solely on the
control request, and the hygiene procedure can still be activated.
The second variable can only be selected after having selected the main
variable, otherwise control variable 2 is automatically reset.
The only difference between probe not configured and probe not
working concerns the ChillBooster operating without temperature probe
alarm, which is only generated when the probe is configured but not
working.
(*) The software verifies consistency between the type of selected
variables. If the selected control variable 2 is a different type (for example,
variable 1 is a temperature value and variable 2 is pressure), the software
automatically resets the second variable field.
ChillBooster as the first stage in high pressure prevention
ChillBooster can be used to prevent high condensing pressure. The
parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b in
the main menu, after having enabled the ChillBooster function. For details
on the prevent function see paragraph 8.3.3. Operation of ChillBooster as
the first stage in high pressure prevention is Similar to the heat recovery
function described in paragraph 6.6.3. The function must be enabled and
an offset must be set in relation to the prevent.
The following operations are allowed between variables:
• DIFFERENCE = Var1 - Var2 (default)
• AVERAGE = (Var1 + Var2)/2
• SUM = Var1 + Var2
• RATIO = Var1 / Var2
6.15 Double line synchronization (DSS)
pRack pR300T can manage some synchronization functions between the
two lines:
• Inhibition of contemporary compressor starts
• Forcing the medium temperature line if the low temperature line is
activated
• Turning off the low temperature line if the medium temperature line is
in a serious alarm condition
The three DSS functions can be enabled independently
Alarms
pRack pR300T can manage up to 2 alarm functions, for which a digital
variable to be monitored, activation delay, priority and any description
can be set. A digital output can be associated to each general alarm
function for the activation of external devices when the alarm is triggered.
One example of use of the generic alarm functions is the detection of gas
leaks.
Attention: in the pRack pR300T software, it is assumed that the
medium temperature line is line L1 while the low temperature line is L2.
Scheduler
pRack pR300T can manage a generic scheduler which activates a digital
output in certain time bands. Up to 4 daily time bands can be set for each
day of the week. Operation of the generic scheduler can also be linked to
the common scheduler and the output activated based on:
• summer/winter
• up to 5 closing periods
• up to 10 special days
See Paragraph 6.7.2 in the pRack PR300T manual code +0300011EN for
details on the time bands.
DSS can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set from main
menu branch E.f.
Inhibition of the contemporary starts
The inhibition of contemporary starts of the compressor can be useful for
all system configurations with two separate lines and in cascading system
configurations. The function that prevents contemporary starts can be
enabled and a delay time can be set for compressor starts belonging to
different lines.
Forcing the medium temperature line
Forcing the medium temperature line can be useful for cascading system
configuration and, once enabled, can force the startup at minimum
power of at least one compressor in the medium temperature L1 line if at
least one compressor in the low temperature L2 line is on.
6.14.1 ChillBooster
pRack PR300T can control the Carel ChillBooster, device used for
evaporative cooling of the air that flows through the condenser.
ChillBooster can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch E.g.
This means that before turning on the low temperature line, the DSS
forces at least one of the compressors in the medium temperature L1
line to turn on at minimum power. The low temperature L2 line thus has
greater priority in relation to the request coming from the regulation for
the medium temperature L1 line.
ChillBooster is activated when two conditions exist:
• the outside temperature exceeds a set threshold
• the fan control request is at the maximum for at least a settable
number of minutes
The maximum request time starts counting again whenever the request
decreases, therefore the request must remain at the maximum for at least
the set time. Activation ends when the request falls below a set threshold.
Turning off the low temperature line
Turning off the low temperature line is forced by the DSS if a serious alarm
occurs which turns off all of the alarms in the medium temperature line
or, in general, if the medium temperature line is OFF.
pRack PR300T can manage an alarm digital input from ChillBooster, the
effect of which is to deactivate the device.
Enable pump-down on medium temperature line
During normal compressor rack operation, when at least one compressor
on the low temperature line is running, the medium temperature
compressor control will enable pump-down. If there is demand,
the minimum capacity step will be guaranteed, only if the medium
temperature line suction pressure is below a set threshold.
As the number of operating hours of ChillBooster is critical as regards
formation of scale on the condenser, pRack PR300T can manage the
operating hour threshold, which should be set to 200 hours.
Note: in the event of failure of the pLAN network, the DSS is
disabled
51
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
• via a EVD EVO external driver (fig. 2.g) or integrated in PRK30TD***
6.16 EEVS: Electronic Expansion Valve
Synchronization
models, in both cases using fieldbus serial.
The new software for managing transcritical systems features the
possibility to manage the 2 stepper valves for high pressure and flash
gas control directly from the pRack controller. The built-in driver on
PRK30TD*** controllers or the external driver (EVD) is controlled via
fieldbus. Direct communication between controller and driver is used to
synchronise compressor rack operation and electronic expansion valve
control.
Communication is managed inside the controller (on PRK30TD*** codes)
or via RS485 serial for external drivers. One single interface (pRack) can
thus be used to monitor / set the main parameters for the EVDEVO and
view them via the supervisor (Modbus communication). The FIELDBUS
DRIVER offers the possibility to use 4 additional analogue inputs (S1, S2,
S3 and S4) directly from pRack.
Where:
S1 Probe 1 (pressure) or external 4 to 20 mA signal
S2 Probe 2 (temperature) or external 0 to 10 V signal (*)
S3 Probe 3 (pressure)
S4 Probe 4 (temperature)
EVD + pRack pR300T connections: via fieldbus
24 Vac
35 VA
TRADRFE240
(dedicated)
shield
S4
2
4
NOA
3
COMA
1
DI1
DI2
G
G0
VBAT
2 AT
G
G0
VBAT
230 Vac
Ultracap Technology
S3
S1
VREF
J26 FBus2
S2
GND
3
GND Tx/Rx
6.16.1 HPV and RPRV valve connection
The HPV and RPRV valves can be connected:
•
directly, controlling the valves using a 0-10 V output on pRack
pR300T
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
Y6
U9
GND
DC17
6.16.2 Unit of measure
J20
Y5
Fig. 6.ax
pRack PR300T can manage two units of measure, the international
system and Imperial.
Note: the temperature and pressure units of measure can be
changed from °C, barg to °F, psig only during start-up; mixed
configurations are not allowed, for example °F and barg.
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
6.16.3 Sign of life
Vout
Vout
24 Vac/Vdc
0V
pRack PR300T can manage a digital output acting as a sign of life,
activated when pRack PR300T is powered up. This output remains active
while the controller is working correctly and highlights any hardware
faults. The Signal can be configured in main menu branch B.a.c.
Fig. 6.av
(*): If one of the two valves is controlled by the driver Carel, while the
other, just is controlled by a signal 0...10V, remember to disable the last
one from the driver with mask Ib99 during Wizard operation or mask
Eic01 if Wizard is completed.
6.16.4 Liquid non-return
pRack PR300T can manage a digital output with the meaning of liquid
non-return. This normally active output is deactivated when all the
compressors are off and no compressor can be started due to alarms or
time settings, despite the control request, or when the unit is OFF. As soon
as at least one compressor is enabled to start, the output is deactivated,
allowing management of a liquid non-return valve. The function can be
configured in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g.
• via an EVD EVO driver configured as 0 to 10 V positioner to control Carel
stepper valves (pressure less than 45 barg) or third party valves (fig. 2.f )
EVD + pRack pR300T connections:
230 Vac
24 Vac
3
2
4
COMA
G
G0
VBAT
G
G0
VBAT
1
NOA
35 VA
TRADRFE240
(dedicated)
2 AT
EVD evolution
S4
DI1
DI2
S3
S1
VREF
S2
GND
Ultracap Technology
GND Tx/Rx
Fig. 6.aw
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
52
ENG
the latter for neutral zone control (1 barg difference between the two set
points should be sufficient). If on the other hand there is a single parallel
compressor managed directly by the main board:
6.16.5 Parallel compressor
pRack pR300T can enable a line of compressors in parallel to the medium
temperature suction line upstream of the RPRV valve using a dedicated
board, and starting from version 3.3.0 this board can be enabled via
pLAN. If managing a single parallel compressor (again starting from
version 3.3.0), the main control board can be used, i.e. without requiring
a dedicated board.
HR1
HR2
Compressor control is proportional with integration error, P+I, and the
various settings, relating to:
• times;
• control;
• inverter modulation;
• alarms;
• analogue output configuration;
can all be found inside the same menu: C.Compressors Æ c.Parallel
compression Æ Ccaxy (see the parameter table)
AUX
COMP
HPV
FLASH
The main variables used to manage activation and control of the parallel
compressor are:
• gas cooler outlet temperature;
• RPRV valve opening percentage;
• receiver pressure set point.
RECEIVER
E2V
E2V
The parallel compressor is activated when the following conditions are true:
EV
• gas cooler outlet temperature above a settable threshold;
• RPRV valve opening percentage above a settable threshold.
E2V
At the same time as the parallel compressor is activated, the receiver
pressure set point will be increased by a settable offset in a settable time.
2
T Gas Cooler > Settable TH
RPRV Opening > Settable TH
Fig. 6.ay
This function is configured in branch COMPRESSORS Æc.Parallel
compress.
AUX Comp Activation
Receiver Setpoint Increase
Fig. 6.az
Increasing the receiver set point results in the flash gas valve (RPRV) closing.
The parallel compressor is not affected by a decrease in the opening of
the RPRV valve, however remains active until parallel compressor control
reaches the set point (depending on how the controller is configured)
T Gas Cooler > Settable TH
If the parallel compressor line is managed using an additional board (via
pLAN or connected via DI/DO):
RPRV Opening > Settable TH
AUX Comp Activation
Receiver Setpoint Increase
Fig. 6.ba
If, on the other hand, the Gas Cooler outlet temperature falls below the
activation threshold, the card that manages the parallel compressor no
longer receives the enabling signal and thus switches off the parallel
compressor:
T Gas Cooler > Settable TH
RPRV Opening > Settable TH
in both cases, the board follows the configuration and relative restrictions
described in the paragraphs on control 6.3 and compressors 6.4.
AUX Comp Activation
Consequently, the first compressor in the parallel line can be controlled
by inverter. It is recommended to use a suction pressure set point value
for the parallel line that is the same as the receiver pressure set point for
proportional control, while the set point should be slightly lower than
Receiver Setpoint Increase
Fig. 6.bb
53
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Oil differential management with parallel compression
The parallel compression function, either integrated (single compressor)
or via pLAN, can also be included in the common oil management by
differential pressure (also see paragraph 6.10.2), and is enabled on screen
Eaab25:
6.16.6 Set point compensation on parallel compressor
Background
In a transcritical CO2 booster system, the parallel compressor allows
system COP to be increased compared to when only using the flash gas
valve. Specific tests have shown that it is possible to improve COP by
increasing the liquid receiver set point (parallel compressor suction set
point) in proportion to the increase in the gas cooler outlet temperature.
The graph below shows the increase in COP considering the effects of the
increase in receiver pressure (t0 - parallel compressor saturated suction
temperature) and the gas cooler outlet temperature/pressure.
Differential oil pressure control by dedicated pressure probe, screen
Eeaa1a:
This manages the opening of the solenoid valve, screen Bac71.
Fig. 6.bc
Description of the algorithm
Parallel compressor set point optimisation is designed to make the
parallel compressor work with the highest possible suction pressure in
proportion to the gas cooler outlet temperature.
NB: this function is only available for managing the internal parallel
compressor. In order to keep the system stable, the parallel compressor
set point is periodically updated, with times and incremental pressure
values that can be modified by parameter (default 30 sec, pressure 0.1
bar).
This digital output is dedicated to the common solenoid valve installed
between the oil separator and oil receiver.
When the oil reservoir pressure approaches the threshold (delta) set on
screen Eaab14:
This will trigger the opening of the valve so as to pressurise the oil
reservoir and ensure correct oil flow to the compressors.
The delta is calculated based on the difference between the medium
temperature compressor suction pressure and the oil receiver pressure.
The status of the function can be checked on screen Aa61:
From the graph it can be seen that the optimal set point is calculated
defined between two gas cooler temperatures, and the maximum
calculation pressure is limited to a settable value.
For integrated parallel compression (single compressor), when the
parallel compressor is active, the reference for calculating the delta will
no longer be more the medium temperature line compressor suction
pressure, but rather the (liquid) receiver pressure, which coincides with
the parallel compressor suction pressure
The changeover in reference from suction to receiver pressure is
automatic, and does not need to be enabled.
Fig. 6.bd
For parallel compression enabled via pLAN, the same I/Os (oil receiver
pressure probe and solenoid valve digital output) and the same settings
(delta and differential) can be used as seen above, or new I/Os and new
parameters can be set on the parallel compressor board (always on
screen Eaab25)
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
54
ENG
In order to avoid premature shutdown of the parallel compressor, the
minimum operating frequency inside which the set point compensation
function applies can also be defined (default 40 Hz).
For example, if the weekly scheduler requires activation of a function,
yet a closing period is in progress, and requires deactivation of the same
function, then the function is deactivated.
The following functions allow the setting of time bands:
• Split-condenser: the function is active only based on the operating
seasons, and consequently special days, closing periods and daily time
bands are ignored.
• Silencer: the function is only active with daily time bands, there is no
link to operating seasons, special days and closing periods
• Heat recovery: the function is active with daily time bands, special
days and closing periods, no link to operating seasons. The link to the
general scheduler can be disabilitato, considering the time bands only.
• Set point compensation: active with operating seasons, special days,
closing periods and daily time bands (two different offsets).
• Generic functions: the generic scheduling function is active with the
operating seasons, special days, closing periods and daily time bands.
Operation of the generic functions can be separated from the generic
scheduler, considering the daily time bands only.
For details on the functions that use time bands, see the corresponding
paragraphs.
The graph shows the behaviour of the compensation function according
to inverter frequency.
6.18 Managing the default values
pRack PR300T can manage two different sets of default values:
• user defaults
• Carel defaults
The two functions can be activated in main menu branch I.d.
Important: after having reset the default values, the pRack PR300T
board need to be switched off and on again.
Fig. 6.be
6.18.1 Saving and resetting the user default values
pRack PR300T can save the exact configuration set by the user inside the
instrument, allowing it to be recalled at any time.
6.17 Settings
All the set values are saved, therefore loading user defaults restores the
exact same conditions that the pRack PR300T controller was in when the
data were saved.
6.17.1 Clock
pRack PR300T features an internal clock with backup battery that keeps
the time and date for all related functions (see Chapter 2 for details
relating to the hardware). The date on pRack PR300T can be set as follows:
• day, month, year (dd/mm/yy)
• month, day, year (mm/dd/yy)
• year, month, day (yy/mm/dd)
The current date and time can be set, the day of the week corresponding
to set date displayed, plus changeover to daylight saving can be enabled
by setting the changeover date and the deviation.
Note: only one user default configuration can be saved, therefore
when the data is next saved, this overwrites the previous data.
Important:
• the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the pRack PR300T
permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible operation;
• the user values cannot be reset after updating the software on the
pRack PR300T (see Chapter 10).
The related parameters can be set during start-up or in main menu
branch F.a.
Note: the date and time are managed on pRack boards with
addresses 1 and 2; on power-up and whenever the pLAN network
is reconnected, the software on pRack synchronises the settings on board
2, sending the date and time set on board 1.
6.18.2 Resetting the Carel default values
The Carel default values are shown in the Parameters table.
The values pre-set by Carel can be installed at any time, restoring the
pRack PR300T default settings, and requiring the startup procedure
described in Chapter 4 to be repeated.
If the clock card is not operating, an alarm is generated and the functions
relating to the time bands described in the following paragraph are not
available.
Important: the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the
pRack PR300T permanent memory, and consequently is an
irreversible operation; nonetheless, the user settings can still be restored
if these have already been saved. Given that pRack PR300T, following the
installation of the Carel default values requires the startup procedure to
be repeated, select the first pre-configuration and then restore the user
defaults.
6.17.2 Time bands
pRack PR300T allows the operating seasons, the closing periods and
weekends to only be set once, and consequently these are common
to all the system functions. As well as these settings, each function can
be associated with a weekly scheduler, setting up to 4 different daily
activation bands for each day of the week. For each time band, the start
and end time can be set and settings made can be copied to the others
days of the week.
Note: to complete a new configuration procedure (reffer to Chapter
4), first restore the Carel default values.
The priority of the schedulers, from lowest to highest, is:
• weekly scheduler
• closing periods
• special days
55
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
It is also possible to set a high and low temperature alarm for these
probes under the Safety - alarms menu (GCA09 and GCA10).
6.19 Water chiller function
Introduction
The pR300T is designed to manage transcritical CO2 systems. However, the
growing interest in the market towards natural gas solutions also requires
the implementation of new operating logic for other applications. The
following paragraphs describe the main functions implemented on the
pR300T in order to manage a chiller application.
Pgc
Tgc
Operating logic
Many of the available software applications offer the following operating
modes:
• At start-up, control is based on the water inlet temperature probe,
using the three PID variables.
• Control then gradually begins to switch to the water outlet probe
reading, while continuing to use the three PID variables.
HPV
Tsuct_L1 Psuct_L1
F
RPRV
Twin
The water chiller function on pRack allows the choice of the following
types of control:
• Control based on heat exchanger water outlet probe
• Control based on heat exchanger water inlet probe
• Optimised control, using the inlet probe at start-up + outlet probe
after a certain time.
Tfreeze
Tank
With control based on the water inlet or outlet probe, the following can
be set in the software:
• Control set point (default: 7°C / 45°F)
• KP (default 10%/°C)
• Ti (default 60sec.)
Twout
Fig. 6.bf
6.19.1 Transcritical CO2 water chiller
With the “water chiller” function, a pR300T can be used for a chiller
application to control the compressors using the heat exchanger water
inlet and outlet temperature probes. The function can be enabled during
the wizard or subsequently in the compressor menu
For optimised control, in addition to the previous parameters, the
following can be set:
• Control set point during the start-up phase (default: 7°C / 45°F)
• KP during the start-up phase (default 10%/°C)
• Ti during the start-up phase (default 60 sec.)
• Duration of the start-up phase (default 180 sec.)
Inlet and outlet temperature probes
In order for the function to work, new temperature probes need to be
added to the system. After enabling the "water chiller" function, the
following probes will be made available:
• Water inlet temperature probe
• Water outlet temperature probe
• Frost temperature probe
Probe fault and auto switch backup sensors
In order to keep the system operating at all times, in the event of fault on
the main control probe, the system can switch to the other temperature
probe (water inlet temperature probe if the outlet probe fails and viceversa). To compensate for the different temperatures between the two
probes and keep the same control set point, an offset can be added to or
subtracted from the set point.
In the event of a fault on both temperature probes, control can switch
to the suction pressure probe (temperature calculated from the suction
pressure probe reading).
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
56
ENG
In this case too, an offset can be added to or subtracted from the set
point.
There is also a frost protection prevention function available (configurable
under “Safety - Prevent”).
This function, if enabled (Gba01), uses a set minimum temperature
threshold (plus differential) below which, after an evaluation time
(Gba07), the unit gradually reduces capacity to the minimum available
step so as to increase the temperature read by the frost protection probe.
If the read temperature exceeds the prevent set + differential, the system
returns to normal operation.
If the prevent function is activated a certain number of times in a defined
period (both can be set), the compressors are stopped.
If both “auto switch sensor” functions are disabled, in the event of an
auxiliary probe alarm, the system will stop the compressors and the
probe fault or not present alarm will be shown.
6.19.2 Expansion valve control
Superheat at the evaporator can be controlled by thermostatic expansion
valves (TXV) or by electronic expansion valves (EXV).
Stand-alone EXV control
When using an electronic expansion valve, superheat modulation can
be managed using an EVD driver in stand-alone mode. In this case, a
pressure transducer and an additional temperature probe are required
for calculating superheat. Superheat and valve control are not directly
managed by the pRack300T controller
EVD external enabling signal
To activate control via the EVD driver, a digital output contact needs to be
configured. This output contact is always active if at least one compressor
is running, except during pump-down mode. The diagram below shows
how the digital output contact behaves during pump-down mode.
6.19.4 Pump management
The water chiller function can directly manage an ON/OFF pump for
water flow inside the evaporator. The pump can be managed using two
types of operating logic:
1. Always on: the pump is started when the unit is switched on and is
switched off (settable deactivation delay) when the unit is switched off
2. With compressor request: the pump is activated at a certain %
of compressor request (settable) and is deactivated (settable
deactivation delay) when all the compressors are switched off.
Fig. 6.bg
In the latter case, while the compressors are off, the pump is cyclically
activated at regular intervals (settable on and off times). In the I/O menu,
a DO is available to manage the pump, plus a DI to manage an optional
flow switch.
6.19.3 Frost protection
To avoid damage to the evaporator due to the formation of ice, a frost
protection function has been added, based on the reading of a dedicated
temperature probe. The frost protection probe is usually installed in the
coldest measurable point of the evaporator. This point is usually identified
near the evaporator water outlet (or inside the evaporator itself, using a
dedicated socket on some models). Once the probe has been configured,
this option allows the compressors to be stopped immediately, ignoring
their timings, when reaching a certain set temperature threshold (the
activation differential and delay can also be set). It is also possible to
choose whether the compressors continue to operate in the event of an
frost protection probe failure, always considering the risk this entails.
57
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Flow switch
The water chiller function on pRack300T can manage an optional
mechanical flow switch to check the flow of water to the evaporator.
With the pump running, if there is no flow, after an evaluation time the
pump and compressors are stopped in order to avoid damage. When the
pump is started, the flow switch check is ignored for a settable time, so
as to avoid any instability of flow inside the heat exchanger during startup from causing false flow alarms. pRack300T features a functional check
on the flow switch; every time the pump is stopped, the system expects
the flow switch contact to change status. If this does not happen, a flow
warning will be signalled with the pump off.
6.20 Maximum capacity limit
This function is used to limit the maximum capacity delivered to a certain
percentage, so as to reduce compressor rack power consumption.The
option is available for both suction lines and can be activated under the
compressor energy saving menu. The function is activated by configuring
a digital input; the maximum operating percentage can be:
• A fixed percentage value, set directly on the activation screen
Pump operation based on compressor request
• A variable percentage in proportion to a set 0-10 V analogue signal. If
the analogue input is not configured, the system shows an alarm.
Fig. 6.bh
6.19.5 Alarms
The water chiller system can identify several alarm conditions. The
following alarms are managed, in addition to those described in the
previous chapters
Delta temperature alarm
This function, which can be enabled under the Safety - alarm menu,
checks the differential temperature between the water inlet and the
chiller, and if this exceeds a certain threshold, a warning is generated. If
the value is higher than design conditions, it means there is low water
flow through the evaporator. A differential and an evaluation time can
also be set for this alarm.
• A percentage value that can be set via the supervisory system.
For fixed or variable values based on an analogue signal, the function is
always activated via a set digital input.
High/low probe temperature alarm
For each temperature probe, a high temperature and low temperature
threshold can be set, with corresponding differential. In both cases, an
evaluation time can be set before verifying the alarm.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
58
ENG
If the primary valves are managed via Fieldbus, the corresponding backup
valve can be activated with the following alarms:
• Valve motor alarm only
• Driver disconnected alarm only
• All EVD alarms
6.21 Valve backup function
On pRack300T, the backup function can be used to manage a second
CO2 HPV and/or RPRV valve in the event of a fault on the primary valve.
The system also allows the backup valves to be used to supplement the
primary valves if these are unable to keep the pressure at the set point.
pRack configuration for backup/supplementary function
If the primary valves are managed by a 0-10 V signal, the corresponding
backup valve must be activated via a dedicated digital input on pRack300T
The same digital input can be used to activate the backup valves in
manual mode.
Fig. 6.bi
The pair of backup valves must be controlled by a second EVD driver, as
on pRack these can only be managed via a 0-10 V signal.
The primary valves, on the other hand, can be managed by drivers both
with Fieldbus connection and with 0-10 V signal. A mixed configuration
is also allowed, with one valve connected to a driver via Fieldbus and a
second valve managed with a 0-10 V signal.
The hardware configuration for the backup and supplementary functions
is the same, and at a software level the two functions can be enabled and
disabled independently.
Primary driver forced closing
Failure of the primary driver may not guarantee closure of the
corresponding valve and consequently a malfunction of the backup
valve. To avoid this problem, the system provides for the configuration
(optional) of a digital output that can be used to isolate the primary valve
from the fluid circuit.
6.21.1 Backup function settings
The HPV or RPRV valve backup function can be activated when:
• Primary HPV/RPRV valve not working (primary EVD alarm)
• Digital input for manual activation is closed
In both cases, the system closes the faulty valve and activates the related
digital + analogue outputs to manage the EVD driver used for the backup
valve.
Fig. 6.bj
This output is deactivated when the backup valve is activated.
59
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
6.21.2 Supplementary function settings
6.22 Double line inverter management
The supplementary function uses the same backup valves to assist
the primary valves if these are unable to maintain the set pressure (e.g.
primary valve does not open completely).
The supplementary function can be enabled independently for the HPV/
RPRV valve and can also be either exclusive or in addition to the backup
function.
Starting from software version 4.2.0, pRack can manage two inverterdriven compressors on each line.
The number of compressors managed by the inverter can be selected
both during the wizard and after the wizard has been completed.
The configuration of the two inverters is the same in both case;, the
operating frequency range, operating times, nominal frequency and
power, up and down ramps can all be configured independently.
Operation
When the request exceeds the minimum capacity of the inverter
compressor, the first available inverter is switched on.
If the first inverter reaches 100%, the second is activated and the request
is shared between the two compressors, which will now operate at the
same frequency.
If both inverters reach 100%, the system starts the fixed compressors, in
the usual mode.
If the request increases quickly, the controller can activate the second
inverter compressor without waiting for the first to reach 100% capacity.
If the request decreases, the controller switches off, in sequence, first
the fixed-speed compressors (if present), then decreases the speed
of both inverters to the minimum frequency, switches off one inverter
compressor and then adjusts the speed of the first inverter based on the
request.
Fig. 6.bk
As shown in the graph, the supplementary function will be activated
when:
• The pressure does not reach a certain set point
• The primary valve opening percentage does not reach a certain set
point
• Both of these conditions described above are active for a certain period
In addition to the pressure and the opening of the primary valve for
activating the supplementary valve, it is also possible to limit the opening
of the latter.
The supplementary valve is deactivated when the opening of the primary
valve subsequently falls below a certain value for a certain time; both
parameters can be set freely.
Fig. 6.bl
As the supplementary function is considered an emergency situation,
after a certain number of activations within a certain period, an alarm is
generated.
For these functions, the alarms can be reset and the primary valves
restored only by manually accessing a specific menu screen
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
60
ENG
7. PARAMETERS AND ALARMS TABLE
7.1 Parameter table
"Mask index": indicates the unique address of each screen and therefore the path for reaching the parameters in that screen. For example, to reach
the parameters related to the suction pressure probe with mask index Bab01, proceed as follows:
Main Menù
B.In./Out.Îa.StatusÎb.Analog.in.
Below is the table of parameters that can be displayed on the terminal.
The values indicated with '---' are not significant or are not set, while the values indicated with '...' may vary according to the configuration and the possible
options are visible on the user terminal. A line of '...' means that there are a series of parameters similar to the previous ones.
Note: not all of the screens and parameters in the table are always visible/settable, the visible/settable screens and parameters depend upon the
configuration and access level.
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M. Values
----Suction
Gas cool.
Superheat
Suc.Temp.
Disch.Temp.
Hour and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature
Gas cooler pressure or temperature
Superheating
Suction temperature
Discharge temperature
---------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Unit status (with unit OFF)
---
---
Number compressors on (with unit ON)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON)
Number of fans on (with unit ON)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON)
Hour and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (line 1)
Gas cooler pressure or temperature (line 1)
Superheating (line 1)
Suction temperature (line 1)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
Number compressors on (with unit ON, line 1)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
Number of fans on (with unit ON, line 1)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (line 2)
Superheating (line 2)
Suction temperature (line 2)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
Number compressors on (with unit ON, line 2)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2)
Number of fans on (with unit ON, line 2)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2)
Hour and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (line 1)
Gas cooler pressure or temperature (line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (line 2)
Suction temperature (line 1)
Superheating (line 1)
Suction temperature (line 2)
Superheating (line 2)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2)
Hour and minutes
Date
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--%
--%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
----%
--%
…
…
…
…
…
----%
--%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
--%
%
%
%
…
…
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Unit OFF due to Alarms
Unit OFF due to black out
Unit OFF from supervisor
Unit OFF from default
Unit OFF from digital input
Unit OFF from keypad
Unit OFF from manual mode
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
See individual line mask values
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
See individual line mask values
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
See individual line mask values
0…100
0…100
0 to 100
0…100
…
…
Suction pressure or temperature (line 1)
---
…
…(**)
Suction pressure or temperature (line 2)
Gas cooler pressure or temperature
Suction temperature (line 1)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
Superheating (line 1)
Suction temperature (line 2)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
Superheating (line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2)
Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1)
-------------------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
--%
%
%
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
See individual line mask values
0…100
0…100
0…100
Main Mask
Main mask for
individual suction
line and individual
condensing line --(display only)
------------L1-Suction
L1-Gas cool.
L1-Superheat
L1-Suc.Temp.
L1-Disch.Temp.
--Main mask for
--double suction
--line and double
--condensing line,
--masks separated L2-Suction
per each line
L2-Condens.
(display only)
L2-Superheat
L2-Suc.Temp.
L2-Disch.Temp.
--------------L1-Suction
L1-Gas cool.
L2-Suction
Main mask for
L2-Condens.
double suction
L1-Suc.Temp.
L1-Superheat
line and double
condensing line, L2-Suc.Temp.
one mask for both L2-Superheat
lines (display only) L1-Disch.Temp.
L2-Disch.Temp.
--------------Suction:
L1
L2
Gas cooler
Main mask for
L1-Suc.Temp.
double suction
line and individual L1-Disch.Temp.
L1-Superheat
condensing line, L2-Suc.Temp.
(display only)
L2-Disch.Temp.
L2-Superheat
---------
Tab. 7.a
61
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
A. Unit status
Aa01 (display
only)
Aa02 (display
only)
Aa03 (display
only)
Aa04 (display
only)
Aa05 (display
only)
Aa11 (display
only)
Aa12 (display
only)
Aa13 (display
only)
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Act/Req.
Reg. Status
Suction pressure (line 1)
Suction saturated temperature (line 1)
Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 1)
Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 1)
Suction saturated temperature (line 1)
Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 1)
Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 1)
Power delivered/Power requested per suction line (line 1)
Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 1)
---------------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg. Type
Compressor regulation type (line 1)
---
---
Setpoint
C01, C02, …C12
C01
Actual suction setpoint (with compensations applied, line 1)
Time remaining for next compressor startup (line 1)
Power delivered from compressor 1 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some
form of compressor power forcing is active, e.g., safety times, alarms, startup procedure)
…
Power delivered from compressor 12 (line 1)
Suction temperature (line 1)
Superheating (line 1)
Discharge temperature compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Discharge temperature compressor 6 (line 1)
Oil temperature compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Oil temperature compressor 6 (line 1)
Digital output number associated and liquid injection/economizer (*) status compressor 1
(line 1)
…
Digital output number associated and liquid injection/economizer (*) status compressor 6
(line 1)
Discharge temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Capacity reduction Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) in progress
Oil sump temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Oil dilution status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Operational status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
-------
…
s
%
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
0 | 0 …100 | 100
Stop | Increase
Decrease
Stand-by
Functioning
Timings | Alarms
Proportional Band
Dead Zone
…(**)
0…32000
0…100
…
--------…
----…
-----
…
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
0…100
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
0…29
…
---
…
…
…
0…29
---
…
---
…
---
---
…
C12
Temperature
Superheat.
Disch. 1
…
Disch. 6
Oil Temp 1
…
Oil Temp 6
In.liq.1: DO
…
In.liq.6: DO
Aa15 (display
only)
Aa16 (display
only)
Aa20 (display
only)
Aa21 (display
only)
Aa22 (display
only)
Aa23 (display
only)
Discharge temperature
Cap.Reduction
Oil sump T.
Oil status
Status
Count
Compr.
Valve
Cap.Req.
ActualCapac.
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Act/Req
Reg. Status
Safety time count Digital Scroll compressor (line 1)
Status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Status Digital Scroll TM valve (line 1)
Capacity requested Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Actual capacity Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Condensing saturated temperature (line 1)
Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 1)
Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Condensing saturated temperature (line 1)
Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 1)
Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 1)
Power delivered/Power requested per condensing line (line 1)
Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 1)
-------------------------------
s
----%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg. Type
Gas cooler regulation type (line 1)
---
---
Setpoint
F1
-----
…
%
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Act/Req.
Reg. Status
Actual setpoint gas cooler (line 1)
Power delivered from fan 1 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
power forcing is active)
…
Power delivered from fan 8 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
power forcing is active)
Power delivered from fan 9 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
power forcing is active)
…
Power delivered from fan 16 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
power forcing is active)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
External temperature (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Suction saturated temperature (line 2)
Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 2)
Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 2)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Suction saturated temperature (line 2)
Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 2)
Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 2)
Power delivered/Power requested per suction line (line 2)
Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 2)
…(**)
NO | YES
…(**)
OK | Diluted
OFF | Start
ON | Alarm
0…999
ON | OFF
ON | OFF
0…100
0…100
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
0 | 0 …100 | 100
Stop | Increase
Decrease
Stand-by
Functioning
Timings | Alarms
Proportional Band
Dead Zone
…(**)
0…100
-------------------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg. Type
Compressor regulation type (line 2)
---
---
Setpoint
C01, C02, …C12
C01
Actual suction setpoint (with compensations applied, line 2)
Time remaining for next compressor startup (line 2)
Power delivered from compressor 1 from line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that
some form of compressor power forcing is active, e.g., safety times, alarms, startup procedure)
…
Power delivered from compressor 12 (line 2)
-------
…
s
%
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
0 | 0 …100 | 100
Stop | Increase
Decrease
Stand-by
Functioning
Timings | Alarms
Proportional Band
Dead Zone
…(**)
0…32000
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
…
F8
Aa24 (display
only)
F9
…
F16
Aa25 (display
only)
Aa31 (display
only)
Aa32 (display
only)
Aa33 (display
only)
Aa34 (display
only)
…
C12
TM
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
62
ENG
Mask index
Aa35 (display
only)
Aa41 (display
only)
Aa43 (display
only)
Aa45 (display
only)
Aa46 (display
only)
Aa50 (display
only)
Aa51 (display
only)
Aa52 (display
only)
Aa53 (display
only)
Display description
Temperature
Superheat.
Disch. 1
…
Disch. 6
In.liq.1: DO
…
In.liq.6: DO
Discharge temperature
Cap.Reduction
Oil sump T.
Oil status
Status
Description
Suction temperature (line 2)
Superheating (line 2)
Discharge temperature compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Discharge temperature compressor 6 (line 2)
Digital output number associated and liquid injection status compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Digital output number associated and liquid injection status compressor 6 (line 2)
Discharge temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Capacity reduction Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) in progress
Oil sump temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Oil dilution status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Operational status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Count
Compr.
Valve
Cap.Req.
ActualCapac.
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Pressure
Sat.Temp.
ActualSet
Differen.
Act/Req.
Reg. Status
------…
----…
-----
U. of M.
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
…
---
---
Safety time count Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Status Digital Scroll TM valve (line 2)
Capacity requested Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Actual capacity Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Condensing saturated temperature (line 2)
Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 2)
Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Condensing saturated temperature (line 2)
Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 2)
Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 2)
Power delivered/Power requested per condensing line (line 2)
Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 2)
-------------------------------
s
----%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg. Type
Condenser regulation Type (line 2)
---
Setpoint
F1
Actual condensing setpoint (with compensations applied, line 2)
--Power delivered from fan 1 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
--power forcing is active)
…
…
Power delivered from fan 8 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
--power forcing is active)
Power delivered from fan 9 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
--power forcing is active)
…
…
Power delivered from fan 16 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of
--power forcing is active)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
--External temperature (line 2)
--Suction pressure value in the medium temperature compressor line
--Oil receiver pressure value
--Difference between receiver oil pressure and suction pressure (medium temperature
--compressors or liquid receiver when integrated parallel compressor activated or in pLAN
when using the same I/Os)
Pressure differential set point (receiver - suction)
1.0
Return differential for deactivation of the oil differential function
0.5
NO
Oil differential function status (YESÆ ACTIVE, NOÆ INACTIVE)
Driver pressure probe S1 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Driver pressure probe S2 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Driver pressure probe S3 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Driver pressure probe S4 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Driver digital input 1 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Driver digital input 2 (driver connected in Fieldbus)
--Parallel compressor status
ON/OFF
…
F8
Aa54 (display
only)
F9
…
F16
Aa55 (display
only)
Aa61
(display only)
Aa65
Aa66
Aa77 (display
only)
Aaa76 (display
only)
Aaa77 (display
only)
Aaan (display
only)
…
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Suct Press
Oil Press
Delta
Actual Setp
Differential
State
S1 probe
S2 probe
S3 probe
S4 probe
Digital input staus 1
Digital input staus 2
Parallel compressor status:
GC out.temp.:
RPRV opening:
RPRV setp.:
HR Total Request:
Status:
Run actions:
Min HPV set.:
Offset GC:
HR prevent:
HR Total Request:
Bypass Allowed
GC out. Temp:
GC byp. Temp:
GC reg. temp:
Gas Cooler byp:
Reg.var.
Enable
Setpoint
Differen.
Mode
Status
…
Def.
Gas Cooler Outlet temperature
RPRV valve opening
RPRV Setpoint
Percentage of heat reclaim used to activate different actions. It can refer to HR1 or HR2 or
HR1+HR2
Detailed description of current running action
Run actions presence
Current minimum HPV setpoint
Current temperature GC offset (to increase GC setpoint)
HR configured as prevent and active
Percentage of heat reclaim used to activate different actions. It can refer to HR1 or HR2 or
HR1+HR2
Status of bypass allowed
Current GC out temperature
Current GC baypassed temperature
Current regulation temperature: Tgc out if bypass off, Tgc byp if bypass on
Opening percentage of bypass valve
Value of the regulation variable for the generic function in stage 1
Status of the enabling variable for the generic function in stage 1
Regulation setpoint for the generic function in stage 1
Regulation differential for the generic function in stage 1
Regulation mode for the generic function in stage 1 (direct or reverse)
Status of the generic function in stage 1
…
63
…
%
Values
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
0…29 | ON | OFF
…
0…29 | ON | OFF
…(**)
NO | YES
…(**)
Ok | Diluted
OFF
start
ON
Alarm
OFF for time
ON for time
manual mode
in pump down
0…999
ON | OFF
ON | OFF
0…100
0…100
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
0 | 0 …100 | 100
stop
increase
decrease
stand-by
functioning
timings
alarms
Proportional Band
Dead zone
…(**)
0…100
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
%
…
0…100
…
…
…
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
barg/psig …
barg/psig …
--YES | NO
bar
-290…2900
°C
-870…2900
bar
-290…2900
°C
-870…2900
--Open | Closed
--Open | Closed
ON | OFF |
not active
°C/°F
%
barg
%
YES | No
40
barg
°C/°F
ON | OFF
%
------------…
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
%
…
--…
…
----…
…(**)
Not active | Active
…(**)
…(**)
D, R
Not active | Active
…
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Aaar (display
only)
Aaas (display
only)
Aaat (display
only)
Aaau (display
only)
Aaav (display
only)
Aaaw (display
only)
Display description
Reg.var.
Enable
Setpoint
Differen.
Mode
Status
Reg.variab.
Enable
Setpoint
Differen.
Mode
Status
Reg.variab.
Enable
Setpoint
Differen.
Mode
Status
Reg.variab.
Enable
Type
Delay
Status
Reg.variab.
Enable
Type
Delay
Status
Day
F1: --:-- -> --:-…
F4: --:-- -> --:--
Aaax (display
only)
Aaay (display
only)
Aaaz (display
only)
Aaba (display
only)
Aabb (display
only)
Aabc (display
only)
Ab01 (display
only)
Status
HR 1 Request:
HR 1 Status:
Water temp.:
Valve:
Pump:
Pump An. Out:
HR 2 Request:
HR 2 Status:
Water temp.:
Valve:
Pump:
Pump An. Out:
Status
Ext.Temp.
Thresh.est.t.
F.Time100%
Status
Ext.Temp.
Thresh.est.t.
F.Time100%
Cond.Temp.
LiquidTemp
Subcool
Status
Cond.Temp.
LiquidTemp
Subcool
Status
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Ab02 (display
only)
Diff.
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Ab03 (display
only)
Dead zone
Incr.Diff.
Decr.Diff.
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Ab04 (display
only)
Diff.
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Ab05 (display
only)
Dead zone
Incr.Diff.
Decr.Diff.
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Diff.
Description
Def.
Value of the regulation variable for the generic function in stage 5
--Status of the enabling variable for the generic function in stage 5
--Regulation setpoint for the generic function in stage 5
--Regulation differential for the generic function in stage 5
--Regulation mode for the generic function in stage 5 (direct or reverse)
--Status of the generic function in stage 5
--Value of the regulation variable for generic modulating function 1
--Status of the enabling variable for generic modulating function 1
--Regulation setpoint for generic modulating function 1
--Regulation differential for generic modulating function 1
--Regulation mode for generic modulating function 1 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic modulating function 1
--Value of the regulation variable for generic modulating function 2
--Status of the enabling variable for generic modulating function 2
--Regulation setpoint for generic modulating function 2
--Regulation differential for generic modulating function 2
--Regulation mode for generic modulating function 2 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic modulating function 2
--Value of the regulation variable for generic alarm function 1
--Status of the enabling variable for generic alarm function 1
--Type of alarm for generic alarm function 1
--Regulation differential for generic alarm function 1
--Status of generic alarm function 1
--Value of the regulation variable for generic alarm function 2
--Status of the enabling variable for generic alarm function 2
--Type of alarm for generic alarm function 2
--Regulation differential for generic alarm function 2
--Status of generic alarm function 2
--Day of the week
--Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute for the
--generic scheduling function
…
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute for the
--generic scheduling function
Status of the general scheduling function
--Percentage of first heat reclaim request
Status of first heat reclaim request
Water temperature with HR1 regulated by temperature
Status of first heat reclaim valve
Status of first heat reclaim pump
Running percentage of first heat reclaim pump
Percentage of second heat reclaim request
Status of second heat reclaim request
Water temperature with HR2 regulated by temperature
Status of second heat reclaim valve
Status of second heat reclaim pump
Running Percentage of second heat reclaim pump
Status of the ChillBooster device (line 1)
--External temperature (line 1)
--Threshold for activating the ChillBooster device (line 1)
--Number of minutes passed with fan at 100/number of minutes allowed (line 1)
--Status of the ChillBooster device (line 2)
--External temperature (line 2)
--Threshold for activating the ChillBooster device (line 2)
--Number of minutes passed with fan at 100/number of minutes allowed (line 2)
--Condensing saturated temperature (line 1)
--Liquid temperature (line 1)
--Subcooling (line 1)
--Status of the subcooling function (line 1)
--Condensing saturated temperature (line 2)
--Liquid temperature (line 2)
--Subcooling (line 2)
--Status of the subcooling function (line 2)
--Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--(line 1)
Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--compensations applied, line 1)
Suction regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 1)
--Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--(line 1)
Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--compensations applied, line 1)
Dead zone for suction regulation under pressure (line 1)
--Increase differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1)
--Decrease differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1)
--Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--(line 2)
Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--compensations applied, line 2)
Suction regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 2)
--Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--(line 2)
Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--compensations applied, line 2)
Dead zone for suction regulation under pressure (line 2)
--Increase differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2)
--Decrease differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2)
--Setpoint set by the user for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--(line 1)
Actual setpoint for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--compensations applied, line 1)
Gas cooler regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 1)
---
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
64
U. of M.
…
--…
…
----…
--…
…
--%
…
--…
…
--%
------s
--------s
----…
Values
…(**)
Not active | Active
…(**)
…(**)
D, R
Not active | Active
…(**)
Not active | Active
…(**)
…(**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
…(**)
Not active | Active
…(**)
…(**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
Not active | Active
Not active | Active
Normal | Serious
0…9999
Not active | Active
Not active | Active
Not active | Active
Normal | Serious
0…9999
Not active | Active
Monday, ..., Sunday
…
…
…
…
…
--%
Not active | Active
ON | OFF
°C/°F
Open | Closed
ON | OFF
%
%
ON | OFF
°C/°F
Open | Closed
ON | OFF
%
--…
…
min
--…
…
min
…
…
…
--…
…
…
--…
ON | OFF
…(**)
…(**)
0…999 | 0…999
ON | OFF
…(**)
…(**)
0…999 | 0…999
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Open | Closed
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Open | Closed
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…(**)
ENG
Mask index
Ab06 (display
only)
Display description
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Dead zone
Incr.Diff.
Decr.Diff.
Ab07 (display
only)
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Ab08 (display
only)
Diff.
UserSetp.
ActualSetp.
Dead zone
Incr.Diff.
Decr.Diff.
Ab12
Ab13
Ab14
Ab15
Ac01
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Status
--L1:
L2:
----Enable unit On/Off
from digital input
From supervisor
Due to black out
Delay unit startup after
blackout
Enable unit On/Off
from digital input
From supervisor
Due to black out
Unit startup delay after
blackout
Ac02
Ac03
Ac04
Ac06
Ac07
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Setpoint set by the user for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--…
(line 1)
Actual setpoint for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--…
compensations applied, line 1)
Dead zone for gas cooler regulation under pressure (line 1)
--…
Increase differential for gas cooler regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone
--…
(line 1)
Decrease differential for gas cooler regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone
--…
(line 1)
Setpoint set by the user for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--…
(line 2)
Actual setpoint for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--…
compensations applied, line 2)
Condensing regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 2)
--…
Setpoint set by the user for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation
--…
(line 2)
Actual setpoint for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with
--…
compensations applied, line 2)
Dead zone for condensing regulation under pressure (line 1)
--…
Increase differential for condensing regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone
--…
(line 2)
Decrease differential for condensing regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone
--…
(line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
26.0 barg
…
Setpoint without compensation (gas cooler line 1)
12.0 °C
…
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
12.0 barg
…
Setpoint without compensation (condens. line 2)
12.0 barg
…
Unit status (display only)
OFF from
--keypad
Values
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
OFF
OFF da
tastiera
OFF
OFF
NO
-----
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Wait...
Unit ON
OFF from Alarm
OFF from blackout
OFF from BMS
OFF from default
OFF from DIN
OFF from keypad
Manual Funct. work
Prevent from HP
OFF | ON
… (see Ac01 above)
-------
OFF | ON
OFF | ON
NO | YES
Enable on-off from supervisor (line 1)
Enable on-off due to black out (line 1)
Delay unit startup after blackout (line 1)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO | YES
NO | YES
0…999
Enable unit On/Off from digital input (line 2)
NO
---
NO | YES
Enable on-off from supervisor (line 2)
Enable on-off due to black out (line 2)
Unit startup delay after blackout (line 2)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO | YES
NO | YES
0…999
On-off from keypad (line 1)
Unit status (display only)
On-off from keypad (line 1)
On-off from keypad (line 2)
Enable unit On/Off from digital input (line 1)
Tab. 7.b
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
---
---, 01…18,
U1…U10 (****)
Closed | Open
NC | NO
Not active | Active
…
--- | 01…18 |
U1…U10 (****)
Closed | Open
NC | NO
Not active | Active
…
---, U1…U10 (****)
--0-1V
0-10V
4...20mA
0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
U1…U10 (****)
---- | 0-1V | 0-10V
4...20mA | 0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
U1…U10 (****)
----, 0-1V
0-10V
4...20mA
0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
B.Inp./Out.
The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of available I/Os.
Baa02
03
DI
Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position(line 1)
…
Baacf
…
Bab01
Bab63
Bab65
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 1)
…
--NC
--…
---
------…
---
--NC
--…
B1
4...20mA
------…
-----
DI
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 1)
Status
Logic
Function
…
---
Heat recovery from digital input DI status (line 1)
Heat recovery from digital input DI logic (line 1)
Heat recovery from digital input function status (line 1)
…
Suction pressure probe position (Line 1)
---
Suction pressure probe type (Line 1)
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
-----
Suction pressure value (line 1)
Suction pressure maximum value (line 1)
Suction pressure minimum value (line 1)
Suction pressure probe calibration (Line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe position (line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe type (line 1)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
--4...20mA
…
…
…
…
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
-----
Common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Maximum common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Minimum common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe calibration (line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe position (line 2)
Common oil receiver pressure probe type (line 2)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
--4...20mA
…
…
…
…
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
Common oil receiver pressure value (line 2)
Maximum common oil receiver pressure value (line 2)
Minimum common oil receiver pressure value (line 2)
Common oil receiver pressure probe calibration (line 2)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
…
…
65
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Bab75
…
Bac02
Bac03
…
Bac71
Bacef
…
Bad01
…
Bb01
Display description
-----
Description
Discharge pressure probe position (line 1)
Discharge pressure probe type (line 1)
Def.
--4...20mA
U. of M.
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
…
Line relay DO
Part winding DO/Star relay
DO (*)
---/Delta relay DO (*)
Logic
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function
Discharge pressure value (line 1)
Maximum discharge pressure value (line 1)
Minimum discharge pressure value (line 1)
Discharge pressure probe calibration (line 1)
…
Compressor 1 line relay DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
-----
Values
U1…U10 (****)
----, 0-1V, 0-10V
4...20mA, 0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
--- | 01…18 (****)
--- | 01…18 (****)
Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
Logic for compressor 1 power supply DO (line 1)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1)
Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1)
…
Solenoid valve DO position for managing common oil differential
Solenoid valve DO status for managing common oil differential
Solenoid valve DO logic for managing common oil differential
Status of the solenoid valve for managing common oil differential
…
NO
…
--NO
--…
----NC
---
------------…
---------
---, 01…18 (****)
NC | NO
---, 01…18 (****)
Closed | Open
NC | NO
Not active | Active
…
---, 01…18 (****)
Closed | Open
NC | NO
Not active | Active
DO Line relay
Logic:
…
AO
Status (display only)
…
Suction L1
Suction L2
Condenser L1
Condenser L2
Timeout
DO position and On/Off Status Parallel compressor consent
Logic Parallel compressor consent DO:
…
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
Modulating device output value (line 1)
…
Suction line 1 in manual mode
Suction line 2 in manual mode
Condenser line 1 in manual mode
Condenser line 2 in manual mode
Manual mode duration after last key pressed
…
NA
…
0
0
…
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
10
OFF
…
…
…
--%
…
--------min
---
Compressor 1
Force to
Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 1)
…
…
…
OFF
…
---
Compressor 12
Force to
Manual stages request for compressor 12 (line 1)
OFF
---
---, 01…18 (****)
NC | NA
…
---, 01…06 (****)
0.0…100.0
…
Disabled | abled
Disabled | abled
Disabled | abled
Disabled | abled
0…500
OFF | ON
2 STAGES (*)
3 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
OFF | ON
2 STAGES (*)
3 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
Bba02
…
Bba16
Bba17
Bba18
Oil Cool. pump 1
Force to
Oil cool pump 2
Force to
Oil cool fan 1
Force to
Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 1)
Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 1)
Manual operation status for oil cooling fan 1 (line 1)
Bba20
…
Bba34
Bba35
Bba37
Bba38
…
Bba53
Bba54
Bba55
Bba57
…
Bba72
Bba73
Bba74
Bbb05
Bbb06
Bbb07
Bbb08
Bbb09
Bbb10
Bbb11
Bbb12
Compressor 1
Force to
Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 2)
…
…
Compressor 12
Force to
Manual stages request for compressor 12 (line 2)
Oil Cool. pump 1
Force to
Oil Cool. pump 2
Force to
Oil cool fan 1
Force to
Fan 1
Force to
…
Fan 16
Force to
Heat rec.pump
Force to
ChillBooster
Force to
Fan 1
Force to
…
Fan 16
Force to
Heat rec.pump
Force to
ChillBooster
Force to
Compressor 1
Force to
Oil cool. pump
Force to
Compressor 1
Force to
Oil cool. pump
Force to
Fan 1
Force to
Heat recovery pump
Force to
Fan 1
Force to
Heat recovery pump
Force to
Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 2)
Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 2)
Manual operation status for oil cooling fan (line 2)
Manual operation status for fan 1 (line 1)
…
Manual operation status for fan 16 (line 1)
Manual operation status for heat recovery pump (line 1)
Manual operation status for ChillBooster (line 1)
Manual operation status for fan 1 (line 2)
…
Manual operation status for fan 16 (line 2)
Manual operation status for heat recovery pump (line 2)
Manual operation status for ChillBooster (line 2)
Manual request for continuous capacity for compressor 1 (line 1)
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 1)
Manual request for continuous capacity for compressor 1 (line 2)
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 2)
Manual request for continuous capacity for fan 1 (line 1)
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 1)
Manual request for continuous capacity for fan 1 (line 2)
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 2)
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
66
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
…
OFF
…
---
OFF
---
OFF | ON
2 STAGES (*)
3 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
OFF | ON
2 STAGES (*)
3 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
…
OFF
…
---
…
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
…
OFF
…
---
…
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
OFF
---
OFF | ON
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
ENG
Mask index
Bbb75
Bc01
Bc02
Bca10
…
Bca26
Bcb10
…
Bcb12
Display description
-----
Description
Discharge pressure probe position (line 2)
Discharge pressure probe type (line 2)
Def.
--4...20mA
U. of M.
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
Test DO
Timeout
Test AO
Timeout
DO1
--…
D29
--AO1
…
AO6
Discharge pressure value (line 2)
Maximum discharge pressure value (line 2)
Minimum discharge pressure value (line 2)
Common oil receiver pressure probe calibration (line 2)
Enable DO test mode
Duration of test mode after last key pressed
Enable AO test mode
Duration of test mode after last key pressed
DO 1 test logic
DO 1 test value
…
DO 29 test logic
DO 29 test value
AO 1 test value
…
AO 6 test value
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
NO
10
NO
10
NO
OFF
…
NO
OFF
0.0
…
0.0
…
…
…
…
--min
--min
----…
------…
---
Values
U1…U10 (****)
----, 0-1V, 0-10V
4...20mA, 0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
0…500
NO | YES
0…500
NO | NC
OFF | ON
…
NO | NC
OFF | ON
0.0…100.0
…
0.0…100.0
Tab. 7.c
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
---
--- | 01…18 |
U1…U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, 01…18 (****)
---, 01…18 (****)
C.CompressorS
The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of available I/Os.
Caa01
DI
Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position (line 1)
03
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Line relay DO
Part winding DO/Star relay
DO (*)
---/Delta relay DO (*)
Logic
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
AO
Status (display only)
…
-----
Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 1)
…
Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
Compressor 1 part winding/star DO position and status (On/Off ) display
(line 1)
Compressor 1 DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
Logic for compressor 1 power supply DO (line 1)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1)
Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1)
…
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
Modulating device output value (line 1)
…
Suction pressure probe position (Line 1)
Suction pressure probe type (Line 1)
--NC
--…
…
…
------…
-----
…
NC
…
--NC
--…
0
0
…
B1
4...20 mA
------------…
--%
…
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
…
Regulation
Suction pressure value (line 1)
Suction pressure maximum value (line 1)
Suction pressure minimum value (line 1)
Suction pressure probe calibration (Line 1)
…
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
pressure
…
…
…
…
…
---
Reg. Type
Compressor regulation type (line 1)
dead zone ---
Compressor setpoint lower limit (line 1)
Compressor setpoint upper limit (line 1)
Compressor setpoint (line 1)
Proportional regulation type (line 1)
0.0 barg
40.0 barg
26.0 barg
proporz.
…
…
…
---
Integral time
Integral time for proportional regulation (line 1)
Cab05/Cab7 (**) Differential
Differential for proportional regulation (line 1)
Cab08/Cab10 (**) NZ diff.
Dead zone regulation differential (line 1)
Activ.diff.
Dead zone regulation differential for device activation (line 1)
Deact.diff.
Dead zone regulation differential for device deactivation (line 1)
Cab09/Cab11 (**) En.force off
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Setp. force off
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Cab12
Power to 100%
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation
min time
(suction line 1)
Power to 100%
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation
max time
(suction line 1)
Cab13
Power reduction to 0% min Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1)
time
Power reduction to 0% max Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1)
time
Cac01
Compressor 1 operating hours Compressor 1 operating hours (line 1)
(Check in...)
Compressor 1 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor
Compressor 2 operating hours (line 1)
(Check in...)
Compressor 2 remaining operating hours (line 1)
…
…
…
Cac11
Compress 11 operating hours Compressor 11 operating hours (line 1)
(Check in...)
Compressor 11 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 12
Compressor 12 operating hours (line 1)
(Check in...)
Compressor 12 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Cac13
Compressor threshold
Compressor maintenance threshold hours (line 1)
operating hours
Cac14
Compressor hours reset
Reset compressor operating hours (line 1)
Cad01
Enable suction setpoint
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 1)
compensation
Cad02
Winter offset
Offset applied for the Winter period
Closing offset
Offset applied for closing period
Cad03
Enable setpoint
Enable scheduler setpoint compensation
compensation by scheduler (suction line 1)
300
0.5 barg
0.5 barg
0.7 barg
0.7 barg
NO
0.0 barg
15
s
…
…
…
…
--…
s
---, 01…18 (****)
NC | NO
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
0.0…100.0
…
--- | U1…U10 (****)
----, 0-1 V, 0-10 V
4...20 mA, 0-5 V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
pressure /
temperature
proportional Band
dead Zone
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
proportional /
proport.+int.
0…999
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
…(**)
0…9999
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
--…
--…
…
--…
--…
88000
h
h
h
h
…
h
h
h
h
h
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
…
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
N
NO
-----
N | S
NO | YES
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999,9…999,9
-999,9…999,9
NO | YES
…
Caa08
Caa09
…
Caa14
…
Caaal
…
Cab01
Cab02
Minimum
Maximum
Cab03
Setpoint
Cab04/Cab6 (**) Reg. Type
67
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Cad04
Display description
Day
TB1: --:-- -> --:--
Change
Description
Day of the week
Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(suction line 1)
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(suction line 1)
Time band change action
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1)
Enable floating setpoint (suction line 1)
NO
NO
-----
Max settable floating setpoint (line 1)
Minimum settable floating setpoint (line 1)
Maximum variation allowed for floating setpoint (suction line 1)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Reduction time when supervisor is offline for floating setpoint (suction line 1)
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
0
1/4 (*)
min
---
0…999
0…4 | 7 (*)
Cae02
Change set by DI
Enable floating suction
setpoint
Maximum floating setpoint
Minimum floating setpoint
Max setpoint variation
accepted
Offline decreasingtime
Number of alarms for each
compressor
Alarm 1 descr.
--Save changes
Load previous
Clear all
Monday...Sunday;
Mon-Fri; Mon-Sat;
Sat&Sun; All
NO | YES
NO | YES
Selection of first compressor alarm description: Generic, Overload, High pressure, Low
pressure, Oil (line 1)
…
---
Cae03
Alarm 1 descr. (*)
Selection of first compressor alarm description: Rotation, Oil warning (line 1)
…
---
Cae04
Activ. delay
Activation delay for alarm 1 during operation (line 1)
Startup delay
Activation delay for alarm 1 at startup (line 1)
Reset
Type of reset for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
Priority
Type of priority for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
…
…
High suction pressure/
Type of high suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
temperature alarm
Threshold
High suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
Differen.
High suction pressure/temperature alarm differential
Delay:
High suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Low suction pressure/
Type of low suction pressure/temperature alarm
temperature alarm
Threshold
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
Differen.
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm differential
Delay
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Enable oil temp alarm
Enable Digital Scroll™ oil temperature alarm (line 1)
mgmt. (*)
Enable discharge temp alarm Enable Digital Scroll™ discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
mgmt. (*)
Low superheat alarm
Threshold for low superheat alarm (line 1)
threshold
Differen.
Low superheat alarm differential (line 1)
Switch OFF comp.
Enable compressor shutdown for low superheat alarm (line 1)
Reset
Type of alarm reset for low superheat alarm (line 1)
0
0
automatic
serious
…
absolute
s
s
----…
---
…(**)
…(**)
120
absolute
…
…
s
---
…(**)
…(**)
30
NO
…
…
s
---
:(Not available)
†(Not selected)
;(Selected)
:(Not available)
†(Not selected)
;(Selected)
0…999
0…999
automatic manual
Normal | Serious
…
absolute
relative
…(**)
…(**)
0…999
absolute
relative
…(**)
…(**)
0…999
NO | YES
NO
---
NO | YES
3.0
K
0.0…99,9
1.0
NO
manual
K
-----
0.0…9,9
NO | YES
manual
automatic
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
Disabled
abled
NO | YES
manual
automatic
0…999
Recriprocating |
scroll
1…6 | 12 (*)
Disabled
abled
R22
| R134a
R404A | R407C
R410A | R507A
R290 | R600
R600a | R717
R744 | R728
R1270 | R417A
R422D | R413A
R422A | R423A
R407A | R427A
R245Fa | R407F | R32
0…999
0…999
0…999
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:--
Cad05
Cad08
Cad09
Cad10
Cae01
…
Cae24
Cae25
Cae26
Cae27
Cae28
Cae29
Def.
U. of M.
---
…
Values
MON, TUE, ...SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
Alarm delay
Alarm setpoint
Differential
Switch off compressor with
alarm
Comp 1 off
Reset
Low superheat alarm delay (line 1)
Discharge temperature alarm threshold
Discharge temperature alarm differential
Enable shutdown of compressors with discharge temperature alarm
30
… (**)
… (**)
disabled
s
…
…
---
Enable shutdown of compressor 1 for compressor warning inverter (line 1)
Type of reset for compressor warning inverter (line 1)
NO
manual
-----
Caf02
Alarm delay
Compressor type
Delay for compressor warning inverter (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 1)
0
Recriproc.
s
---
Caf03
Number of compressors
Cmp1,…
Number of compressors (line 1)
Enable compressors (line 1)
2/3 (*)
abled
-----
Caf04
Refrigerant type
Type of refrigerant (suction line 1)
R744
---
Caf05
Min.time on
Min.time off
Minimum time to start same
comp.
Startup
Minimum compressor on time (line 1)
Minimum compressor off time (line 1)
Minimum time between starts of same compressor (line 1)
30
120
360
s
s
s
Type of compressor startup
direct
---
Caf10
Star time
Star delay/line
Star delta delay
Partwinding delay
Equalization
Equal. time
Device rotation type
Star relay run time
Delaty betwen star and line relay
Delay between star and delta relay
Partwinding delay
Enable compressor equalization at startup
Equalization duration
Type of rotation
0
0
0
0
NO
0
FIFO
ms
ms
ms
ms
--s
---
Caf11
Device sequence
Unloader sequence in relation to compressor activation (C=compressor, P=unloader)
CpppCppp ---
Cae31
Cae40
Caf06
Caf07
Caf08
Caf09
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
68
Direct
Part winding
Star delta
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
NO | YES
0…999
--FIFO
LIFO
TIME
CUSTOM
---CCpppppp
CpppCppp
ENG
Mask index
Caf12
Caf13
Caf14
Caf15
Caf16
Caf17
Caf18
Caf19
…
Caf90
Caf91
Caf92
Caf93
Caf95
Cag01
Cag02
Cag03
Cag04
Cag05
Cag06
Display description
Load up time
Shutdown time
Unloader delay
Custom rotation on order
Custom rotation off
Modulation device
Description
Delay between different compressor starts
Delay between different compressor shutdowns
Delay between stages
Order of startup for compressor custom rotation
Order of shutdown for compressor custom rotation
Compressor modulating device type (line 1)
Min frequency
Minimum inverter frequency
Max frequency
Maximum inverter frequency
Min.time on
Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter on (line 1)
Min.time off
Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter off (line 1)
Minimum time to start same Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter startup (line 1)
comp.
Digital comp. valve regulation Digital Scroll™ compressor valve control type (line 1)
…
Cbc01
…
Cbd01
…
Cbe01
…
Cbf02
…
Cbg01
…
Cca02
U. of M.
s
s
s
-------
30
60
30
60
180
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
Cycle time
Oil dilution
Discharge temp
…
Different sizes
Different number of valves
S1
Cycle time (line 1)
Enable Digital Scroll™ oil temperature alarm (line 1)
Enable Digital Scroll™ discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
…
Enable compressors of different sizes (line 1)
Enable compressor partialization (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
YES'
100
s
----…
------kW
…
----kW
--%
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1)
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
60
180
360
…
--kW
--…
--s
s
s
480
min
0…9999
0.0
10.0
50
10.0
90
30
AB
V
V
Hz
kW
s
s
---
NO
---
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
0.0…500.0
0…600
0…600
Disabled
abled
NO | YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
Disabled
---
1.5 barg
NO
0
…
--min
disabled
abled
… (**)
NO | YES
0…15
03
--------…
---
C01
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
…
C12
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Min.time on
Minimum time on for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
Min.time off
Minimum time off for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
Minimum time to start
Minimum time between startups for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
same comp.
Reactivate startup procedure Time for reactivation of startup procedure for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
after
Minimum voltage
Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Maximum voltage
Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Nominal freq.
Nominal frequency (frequency at nominal capacity) (line 1)
Nominal power
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency (line 1)
Rising time
Time to pass from minimum to maximum capacity for modulating device (line 1)
Falling time
Time to pass from maximum to minimum capacity for modulating device (line 1)
Enable compressor modulat. Enable compressor 1 modulation inside dead zone (line 1)
in dead zone
Enable suction press.backup Enable screens for the configuration of the suction pressure backup probe (line 1)
probe
Request in case of regulation Compressor forcing value in case of suction probe fault (line 1)
probe fault
Pumpdown
Enable pumpdown function (line 1)
Threshold
Enable anti return of liquid
Delay
Pumpdown end threshold (line 1)
Enable liquid non return function (line 1)
Delay liquid non return function (line 1)
Optimized --regulation
Values
0…999
0…999
0…999
1…16
1…16
None
Inverter
Digital scroll
0…150
0…150
0…999
0…999
0…999
Optimized regulat.
Variable cycle time
Fixed cycle time
12…20
disable | enable
disable | enable
…
NO | YES
NO | YES
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
--NO | YES
0.0…500.0
NO | YES
100 | 50 | 100 | 50
75 | 100 | 25 | 50
75 | 100 | 33 | 66|100
…
NO | YES
S1…S4
S1…S4 | INV
…
S1…S4
0…999
0…999
0…999
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Cba01
DI
Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position (line 2)
…
Cbb01
Def.
10
0
0
1
1
None
13
enable
enable
…
NO
NO
YES'
10.0
…
NO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Regulation
Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 2)
…
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 2)
--NC
--…
pressure
Reg. Type
Compressor regulation type (line 2)
dead zone ---
…
Compressor 1 operating
hours
…
Enable suction setpoint
compensation
…
Number of alarms for each
compressor
…
Compressor type
…
Compressor 1 operating hours (line 2)
…
---
…
---
--- | 01…18
U1…U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
pressure
temperature
Proportion. band
dead zone
…
0…999999
…
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 2)
…
NO
…
---
…
NO | YES
…
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
…
1
…
---
…
0…4
…
Type of compressors (line 2)
…
Recriproc.
…
---
…
Recriprocating
scroll
1…12
…
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
0.0…500.0
…
0…100
…
…
…
Number of compressors
…
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Nominal freq.
Nominal power
…
RPRV opening
Delay
Min g.c. temp
Tgc off thr
Number of compressors (line 2)
2/3 (*)
…
…
Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
0.0
Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
10.0
Nominal frequency (frequency at nominal capacity) (line 2)
50
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency (line 2)
10.0
…
…
Flash gas valve opening percentage to enable parallel line activation
30
Evaluation time for activation of parallel line from when reaching the set flash valve opening 10
Activation threshold relative to gas cooler outlet temperature
25°C
Parallel compression or parallel compressor line deactivation threshold relative to gas cooler 15°C
outlet temperature
69
--…
Hz
Hz
Hz
Kw
…
%
s
°C/°F
°C/°F
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Cca03
Cca04
Display description
RPRV offset with par. comp.
on
Par. Comp. ON rising time
RPRV
Par. Comp. OFF falling time
RPRV
Setpoint
Prop gain
Ti
Td
Min.time on
Min.time off
Min.time on
same compr.
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Nominal freq.
Nominal power
Nominal freq.
Rising time
Cca05
Cca06
Cca07
Falling time
Cca11
Delay
Delay at start
Reset
Priority
DI
Status
Logic
Function
Comp. Par. disch. Temp
Threshold
Cca12
Eia14
Cca08
Different.
Delay
DO relay line
Logic
AO
Status (display only)
Cca13
Cca14
Description
Offset applied to receiver pressure set point when at least one parallel compressor is active
Def.
2.0 barg
U. of M.
Values
barg/psig …
Time needed to add the offset to the receiver pressure set point
0
s
…
Time needed to subtract the offset from the receiver pressure set point
20
s
…
Set point for proportional control of integrated parallel compressor on the main board
35 barg
Proportional gain for proportional control of integrated parallel compressor on the main
10
board
Integral time for proportional control of integrated parallel compressor on the main board 30
Derivative time for proportional control of integrated parallel compressor on the main board 0
Minimum integrated parallel compressor ON time
30
Minimum integrated parallel compressor OFF time
120
Minimum time between starts of same integrated parallel compressor
360
Voltage corresponding to minimum power of the integrated parallel compressor inverter
Voltage corresponding to maximum power of the integrated parallel compressor inverter
Minimum integrated parallel compressor inverter frequency
Maximum integrated parallel compressor inverter frequency
Nominal frequency (frequency at nominal power) of the integrated parallel compressor
Time to move from integrated parallel compressor modulating device minimum to
maximum power
Time to move from integrated parallel compressor modulating device maximum to
minimum power
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm activation delay
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm activation delay at start-up
Type of integrated parallel compressor generic alarm reset
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm DI input position
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm DI status
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm DI logic
Integrated parallel compressor generic alarm function status
Integrated parallel compressor discharge temperature
High discharge temperature alarm activation threshold for the integrated parallel
compressor
High discharge temperature alarm activation differential for the integrated parallel
compressor
High discharge temperature alarm activation delay for the integrated parallel compressor
DO position and display status (ON/OFF) for integrated parallel compressor
DO logic of integrated parallel compressor power supply
Integrated parallel compressor modulating device AO position
Integrated parallel compressor modulating device AO value
barg/psig
%
0…100
s
s
s
s
s
…
…
0…999
0…999
0…999
0.0
10.0
30
60
50
20
V
V
Hz
Hz
Hz
s
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
0…150
0…150
0…600
20
s
0
s
0
s
automatic …
light
----NC
----120°C
…
----------°C/°F
0…600
0…999
0…999
automatic
manual
light | serious
01…18, U1…U10
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
U1…U10
---
5°C
°C/°F
---
5
--NC
--0.0
s
------%
--DO1…DO18
NC | NO
01…06
0…100.0
Tab. 7.d
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
---
---, 01…18,
U1…U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, U1…U10 (****)
---0-1 V
0-10 V
4...20 mA
0-5 V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
--- | 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
0.0…100.0
…
pressure
temperature
Proportion. band
dead zone
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
D.Condensers
The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of available I/Os.
Daa01
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 1)
…
…
Daa18
…
Daa21
…
Daa38
…
Dab01
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
-----
Fan 1 overload DI status (line 1)
Fan 1 overload DI logic (line 1)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 1)
…
Gas cooler backup probe position (line 1)
Gas cooler backup probe type (line 1)
--NC
--…
B1
4...20 mA
------…
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
AO
Status (display only)
…
Regulation
Gas cooler backup pressure value
Gas cooler backup maximum pressure value (line 1)
Gas cooler backup pressure minimum value (line 1)
Gas cooler backup pressure probe calibration (line 1)
…
Fan 1 DO position (line 1)
Status of fan 1 DO (line 1)
Logic of fan 1 DO (line 1)
Fan 1 function status (line 1)
…
Inverter fan AO position (line 1)
Inverter fan output value (line 1)
…
Condenser regulation by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Note: with HPV valve management, only temperature regulation is enabled
Condenser regulation Type (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
03
--NC
--…
0
0
…
temperat.
…
…
…
…
…
--------…
--%
…
-----
Regulation type
Minimum
Maximum
Dab03
Setpoint
Dab04
Fans work if at least one
compressor works
Dab05
Cut-off enable
Cut-off request
Setpoint
Diff.
Hysteresis
Dab6/ Dab8 (**) Reg. Type
Condenser setpoint lower limit (line 1)
Condenser setpoint upper limit (line 1)
Condenser setpoint (line 1)
Enable fan operation linked to compressor operation
proport.
band
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO
Enable fan cut-off
Cut-off value
Setpoint cut-off
Differential cut-off
Hysteresis cut-off
Proportional regulation type (condensing line 1)
NO
--0.0
%
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
…(**)
…
proportion. ---
Integral time
Dab7/ Dab9 (**) Differential
Dab10/Dab11(**) DZ diff.
Activ.diff.
Deact.diff.
Dab12/Dab13
En.force off
Setp. force off
(**)
Integral time for proportional regulation (cond. line 1)
Differential for proportional regulation (cond. line 1)
Dead zone regulation differential (line 1)
Dead zone regulation differential for device activation (line 1)
Dead zone regulation differential for device deactivation (line 1)
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
300
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO
…(**)
Dab02
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
70
…
…
…
---
s
…
…
…
…
--…
NO | YES
0.0…100.0
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
proportional
proport.+integer
0…999
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
…(**)
ENG
Mask index
Dab14
Dab15
Dac
Dad01
Dad02
Dad03
Dad04
Display description
Power to 100%
min time
Power to 100%
max time
Power reduction to 0%
min time
Power reduction to 0%
max time
-Enable condensing
setpoint compensation
Winter offset
Closing offset
Enable setpoint
compensation by scheduler
TB1: --:-- -> --:--
Description
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation
(condensing line 1)
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation
(condensing line 1)
Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation
(condensing line 1)
Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation
(condensing line 1)
Not available
Enable setpoint compensation (condensing line 1)
Def.
15
U. of M.
s
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
--NO
-----
--NO | YES
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999,9…999,9
-999,9…999,9
NO | YES
---
…
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
Change
Offset applied for the Winter period
Offset applied for closing period
Enable scheduler setpoint compensation
(condensing line 1)
Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(condensing line 1)
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(condensing line 1)
Time band change action
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
---
---
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:--
Values
0…9999
Enable floating gas cooler setpoint (condensing line 1)
NO
---
--- | Save changes
Load previous |
Clear all
MONDAY...SUNDAY;
MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&SUN;
ALL
NO | YES
Setpoint variation for floating gas cooler setpoint (condensing line 1)
Enable floating gas cooler setpoint by digital input
0.0
NO
…
---
-9,9…9,9
NO | YES
Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1)
NO
---
NO | YES
Type of gas cooler high pressure alarm threshold (line 1)
absolute
---
absolute | relative
Gas cooler high pressure alarm delay (line 1)
Gas cooler high pressure alarm threshold (line 1)
60
24.0 barg
s
…
0…999
…(**)
Gas cooler high pressure alarm differential (line 1)
Type of gas cooler low pressure alarm threshold (line 1)
1.0 barg
absolute
…
---
…(**)
absolute | relative
Gas cooler low pressure alarm delay (line 1)
Gas cooler low pressure alarm threshold (line 1)
30
7.0 barg
s
…
0…999
…(**)
Gas cooler low pressure alarm differential (line 1)
Enable common fan overload (line 1)
Common fan alarm delay
Common fan alarm reset type
1.0 barg
YES'
0
automatic
…
--s
---
Number of fans
Fan1, Fan2, ...
Fan13, Fan14, ...
Refrigerant type
Number of fans (line 1)
Enable fan 1...12 (line 1)
Enable fan 13...16 (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (condensing line 1)
3
AB
AB
R744
---------
Daf05
Device rotation type
Type of rotation devices (condensing line 1)
FIFO
---
Daf07, Daf08
Custom rotation
on order
Custom rotation
off
Speed modul. device
On order for devices for custom rotation (condensing line 1)
1
---
…(**)
NO | YES
0…500
automatic
manual
0…16
Disabled | abled
Disabled | abled
R22
| R134a
R404A | R407C
R410A | R507A R290
| R600 R600a | R717
R744 | R728
R1270 | R417A
R422D | R413A
R422A | R423A
R407A | R427A
R245Fa | R407F | R32
-----FIFO
LIFO
TEMPO
CUSTOM
1…16
Off order for devices for custom rotation (condensing line 1)
1
---
1…16
Modulating condenser device type (line 1)
None
---
Fan modulation even in dead zone (line 1)
Minimum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Maximum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Minimum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Maximum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Time to pass from minimum to maximum capacity for fan modulating device (line 1)
Time to pass from maximum to minimum capacity for fan modulating device (line 1)
Number of fans under inverter (only for alarm enabling)
Enable split condenser (line 1)
Split condenser controlled by digital input (line 1)
NO
0.0
10.0
60
100
1200
1200
1
NO
--V
V
%
%
s
s
-----
None | Inverter
Phase cut-off control
NO | YES
0.0…9,9
0.0…99,9
0…100
0…999
0…32000
0…32000
0…16
NO | YES
------10.0 °C
2,5 °C
custom
------…
…
---
Dad05
Enable floating gas cooler
setpoint
Offset for external temp.
Controlled by:
-Dig. input
Change setpoint by digital
input
Gas cooler high pressure
alarm
Delay
Gas cooler high pressure
alarm
Differen.
Gas cooler low pressure
alarm
Delay
Gas cooler low pressure
alarm
Differen.
Common fan overload
Delay
Reset
Daf01
Daf02
Daf03
Daf04
Dad06
Dad07
Dae01
Dae02/Dae06
Dae03
Dae04/Dae07
Dae05
Daf09, Daf10
Dag01
Dag02
Dag03
Dag04
Dag05
Dag06
Dag09
Standby zone reg.
Min out value
Max out value
Min. power ref.
Max. power ref.
Rising time
Falling time
Num. control. fans
Split Condenser
Controlled by:
-Digital input
-External temp
-Scheduler
Ext.Temp.Set.
Ext.Temp.Diff.
Type
--Disable split condenser as
first stage of HP pressure
switch
for
Only when enabling is GREATER THAN or LESS THAN the number of fans to consider (line 1) 0
Disable split condenser when high condensing pressure prevent occurs (line 1)
NO
-----
NO | YES
NO | YES
NO | YES
-99,9…99,9
-99,9…99,9
Custom
Odd
Even
Greater than
Less than
0…16
NO | YES
Duration of split condenser deactivation for high pressure prevent (line 1)
h
0…24
Split condenser controlled by external temperature (line 1)
Split condenser controlled by scheduler (line 1)
Split condenser setpoint by external temperature (line 1)
Split condenser differential by external temperature (line 1)
Fans enabled with split condenser (line 1)
71
0
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Dag10
Dag12
Display description
Silencer
Description
Enable silencer (line 1)
Def.
Disabled
U. of M.
---
Max output
Controlled by:
-Digital input
-Scheduler
TB1: --:-- -> --:--
Maximum possible request when silencer is active (line 1)
Silencer controlled by digital input (condensing line 1)
75.0 %
NO
%
---
Values
Disabled
Abled
0.0…100.0
NO | YES
NO
-----
----…
NO | YES
LUN, ..., DOM
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Change
Silencer controlled by scheduler (condensing line 1)
Day of the week
Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(condensing line 1)
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute
(condensing line 1)
Time band change action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
YES
5
Disabled
25.0 °C
2,5 °C
NO
--s
--…
…
---
--Save changes
Load previous
Clear all
MONDAY...SUNDAY;
MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&SUN;
ALL
NO | YES
0…60
Disabled | abled
-99,9…99,9
-99,9…99,9
NO | YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
…
-------------
--- | 01…18 |
U1…U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
U1…U10 (****)
---- | 0-1V | 0-10V
4...20mA | 0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
pressure / temper.
proportional Band
dead zone
…
NO | YES
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:--
Dag13
Speed Up
Enable speed up (condensing line 1)
Speed up time
Speed up time (condensing line 1)
Ext.Temp.Mgmt
Enable speed up management by external temperature (condensing line 1)
Ext.Temp.Set.
Speed up management by external temperature threshold (condensing line 1)
Diff. Ext.Temp.
Speed up management by external temperature differential (condensing line 1)
Enable gas cooler press.
Enable screens for the configuration of the gas cooler pressure backup probe (condensing
backup probe
line 1)
Request in case of regulation Value of fan forcing in case of gas cooler probe error (line 1)
probe fault
Dag14
Dag15
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Dba01
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 2)
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
-----
Fan 1 overload DI status (line 2)
Fan 1 overload DI logic (line 2)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 2)
Intercooler pressure probe position (downstream)
Intercooler pressure probe type (downstream)
--NC
----4...20mA
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
…
Regulation
Regulation type
Intercooler pressure value (downstream)
Maximum intercooler pressure value (downstream)
Minimum intercooler pressure value (downstream)
Intercooler pressure probe calibration (downstream)
…
Condenser regulation by temperature or pressure (line 2)
Condenser regulation Type (line 2)
…
Enable setpoint compensation (condensing line 2)
…
Condensing high pressure/temperature alarm threshold type (line 2)
…
absolute
…
---
…
Dbf01
…
Dbg01
…
Enable condensing setpoint
compensation
…
Cond.pressure
high alarm
Delay
…
Number of fans
…
Modulate speed device
--…
44.8 barg …
0.0 barg
…
0.0 barg
…
…
…
pressure
--Proportion. --band
…
…
NO
---
Condensing high pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 2)
…
Number of fans (line 2)
…
Modulating condenser device type (line 2)
60
…
3
…
None
s
…
--…
---
…
…
…
…
…
Dba39
…
Dbb01
…
Dbd01
…
Dbe01
…
absolute
relative
0…999
…
0…16
…
None, Inverter
Phase cut-off control
…
Tab. 7.e
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
-----
--- | U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
| 0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HT NTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
NO | YES
0…1 (analog. output)
0…2 (digital output)
NO (digital output)
YES (analog. output)
NO | YES
NO | YES
…(**)
-9,9…9,9
0…999
not configurable
analogic, digital
…
…
0…9999
0…9999
…
…
0…32767
E.Other functions
The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of available I/Os.
Eaaa04
--Oil temperature probe position (line 1)
B1
--Oil temperature probe type (line 1)
4...20 mA
…
Eaaa45
Eaab04
Eaab15
Eaab05
Eaab06
Eaab07
Eaab08
Eaab09
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Enable com.cool.
Number of oil pumps
Oil temperature value (line 1)
Maximum oil temperature value (line 1)
Minimum oil temperature value (line 1)
Oil temperature probe calibration (line 1)
…
Oil level valve compressor 6 DO position (line 1)
Oil level valve compressor 6 DO status (line 1)
Oil level valve compressor 6 DO logic (line 1)
Oil level valve compressor 6 function status (line 1)
Enable common oil cooling (line 1)
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (ine 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
03
--NC
--YES
0
…
…
…
…
…
-------------
Enable pump out.
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 1)
YES
---
Enable cool.
Oil cool. off with comp. off
Setpoint
Differential
Pump start delay
Oil pump config
Enable oil cooling compressors (line 1)
Oil cooling functioning only when compressor functioning
Common oil cooling setpoint (line 1)
Common oil cooling differential (line 1)
Pump 2 start delay after pump 1 startup (line 1)
Oil pump output configuration: none, analog, digital
NO
NO
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
0
non conf.
----…
…
s
---
Setpoint
Differential
Duty on time
Duty off time
Threshold
Differential
Delay
Oil temperature setpoint (line 1)
Oil temperature differential (line 1)
Fan startup time in case of oil probe error (line 1)
Fan shutdown time in case of oil probe error (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm differential (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm delay (line 1)
0.0
0.0
0
0
100.0 °C
10.0 °C
0
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
s
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
72
ENG
Mask index
Eaab10
Eaab11
Eaab12
Eaab13
Eaab14
Eaab16
Eaab20
Ebaa01
Ebab01
Eeaab25
Eeaa1a
Ecaa01
…
Ecaa12
Ecab04 (*)
Edaa01
Display description
Enable oil lev.
Num. oil level alarms
Open time
Closing time
Puls. start delay
Max. puls. time
Oil level controlled by
Min.off valve
Min.lev. delay
Ton Activ.
Toff Activ.
Ton Deact.
Toff Deact.
Threshold
Differential
Delay
Threshold
Differential
Delay
Threshold
Differential
Delay
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Subcooling contr.
Description
Enable oil level management (line 1)
Number of compressor alarms associated with the oil level (line 1)
Oil level valve opening time (line 1)
Oil level valve closing time (line 1)
Delay for oil level valve pulsation at startup (line 1)
Maximum pulsing time of the oil level valve (line 1)
Type of oil level separator control: with minimum level only, with minimum and maximum
level and with compressor status (line 1)
Minimum separator valve closing time (line 1)
Minimum oil level detection delay (line 1)
Valve opening time during oil level reset (line 1)
Valve closing time during oil level reset (line 1)
Valve opening time with correct oil level (line 1)
Valve closing time with correct oil level (line 1)
Oil separator differential pressure threshold (line 1)
Oil separator differential pressure (line 1)
Oil separator differential pressure delay (line 1)
Oil cooler high temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Oil cooler high temperature alarm differential (line 1)
Oil cooler high temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Oil cooler low temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Oil cooler low temperature alarm differential (line 1)
Oil cooler low temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Subcooling DO valve position (line 1)
Subcooling DO valve status (line 1)
Subcooling DO valve logic (line 1)
Status of the subcooling valve function (line 1)
Enable subcooling function (line 1)
Eeaa06
Eeaa09
U. of M.
----s
s
s
s
---
0
s
0
s
10
s
0
s
0
s
10
min
1.0 barg
…
0,5 barg
…
0
s
100.0 °C
°C/°F
10.0 °C
°C/°F
0
s
100.0 °C
°C/°F
10.0 °C
°C/°F
0
s
…
------NO
------NO
--temp.
--Cond&Liqu.
0.0 °C
…
0.0 °C
…
NO
---
Values
NO | YES
0…4 | 7 (*)
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
liv.min. | liv.min.&max
comp. status
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
…(**)
…(**)
0…99
…
…
0 to 9999
…
…
0 to 9999
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
NO | YES
Temp. Cond&Liquid
Only Liquid Temp
-9999,9…9999,9
-999,9…999,9
YES | NO
NO
YES | NO
---
Subcooling control type (line 1)
Threshold
Subcooling (display only)
Enable Oil Pres.diff
management
Manage oil press. with
dedicated settings
Manage oil press. with
dedicated I/O
-----
Threshold for subcooling activation (line 1)
Subcooling value (line 1)
Enable common differential oil management
With dedicated parallel compression board, select whether to use the same settings as the
main board
With dedicated parallel compression board, select whether to use the same inputs and
outputs as the main board
Common oil receiver pressure probe position (line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe type (line 1)
NO
---
YES | NO
--4...20mA
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
-----
Common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Maximum common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Minimum common oil receiver pressure value (line 1)
Common oil receiver pressure probe calibration (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 1)
--44.8 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
B1
4...20mA
…
…
…
…
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibrat.
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Economizer
Comp.Power Thresh.
Cond.Temp.Thresh.
Discharge Temp.Thresh.
-----
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Maximum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Minimum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Compressor 6 economizer valve DO position (line 1)
Compressor 6 economizer valve DO status (line 1)
Compressor 6 economizer valve DO logic (line 1)
Compressor 6 economizer valve function status (line 1)
Enable economizer function (line 1)
Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--NO
0
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
B1
4...20mA
…
…
…
…
…
----------%
…
…
-----
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Compressor 6 liquid injection valve DO position (line 1)
Compressor 6 injection valve DO status (line 1)
Compressor 6 injection valve DO logic (line 1)
Compressor 6 injection valve function status (line 1)
Enable liquid injection function (line 1)
Liquid injection setpoint (line 1)
Liquid injection differential (line 1)
Digital input to activate heat reclaim
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--Disabled
70.0 °C
5.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
----------…
…
…
Status
Logic
Function (display only)
AI HR ext. signal:
Probe Type
Status HR DI (display only)
Logic HR DI
Function Status HR DI
AI HR ext. Signal (HR request)
Probe Type
…
No
…
…
0-10V
…
…
…
%
…
Ext. Signal Value
Upper Value:
Lower Value:
Calibration:
DO Heat Reclaim out
position:
Status (display only)
Logic:
Function (display only)
AO Heat Reclaim water
pump:
Status:
Heat reclaim Ext. Signal Value
Upper Value HR ext. Signal
Lower Value HR ext. Signal
Calibration HR ext. Signal
DO Heat Reclaim out position
…
100%
0%
0%
…
%
%
%
%
…
U1…U10 (****)
----, 0-1V - 0-10V4...20mA- 0-5V
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
---, U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
| 0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HTNTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
NO | YES
0…100
-999,9…999,9
-999,9…999,9
---, U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HTNTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
Disabled | abled
… (**)
… (**)
---, 01…18, U1…
U10 (****)
Open | Closed
NC | No
Not active | Active
---, U1…U10 (****)
0-1V - 0-10V4...20mA- 0-5V
…(**)
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
--- | 01…18 (****)
Status HR DO (display only)
Logic HR DO:
Function HR DO (display only)
AO Heat Reclaim water pump:
…
NO
Active
…
…
…
Open | Closed
NC | NO
Not active | Active
0
…
…
%
--- | 01…06 (****)
…
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
…
Edaa12
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Edab01/Edab03 Liquid inj.
Threshold
(*)
Differential
Eeaa02
DI HR Enable/Activation
Eeaa05
Def.
NO
0
0
0
0
0
livello min.
Status HR AO (display only)
73
---
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Eeab01
Activation indipendent from the closing
No
YES | NO
Eeab07
Display description
Enable heat reclaim 1:
Enable heat reclaim 2:
Consider contribution for
tot. req.:
Gas Cooler Pressure
lower limit
Min toff betw. 2 activ.
Heat reclaim 1:
Min toff betw. 2 activ.
Heat reclaim 2:
Disable floating cond.
By heat reclaim:
Enable activation by
scheduler:
Activation indipendent
from the closing:
HR1 Regulation type:
Different type of regulation of first heat reclaim
Temperat.
External Signal
Temperature
Digital Input
Setpoint if HR1 is regulated by temperature
Kp if HR1 is regulated by temperature
Integral time if HR1 is regulated by temperature
Type of valve of first heat reclaim
55
1
200
ON/OFF
°C/°F
%/°C
s
Eeab08
Setpoint
Kp:
Integral time:
HR1 Valve type:
Activation thr:
De-activat thr:
Activation delay:
En. Pump:
Pump type:
Threshold to activate valve output HR1
Threshold to de-activate valve output HR1
Delay to activate valve output HR1
Enable pump of first heat reclaim
Selection of pump type of first heat reclaim
10.0
5.0
30
No
%
%
s
Pump delay off:
Pump regulation type:
Delay to switch off pump HR1
Different type of pump regulation of first heat reclaim
0
s
HR request
Eeab02
Eeab04
Eeab05
Eeab09
Eeab10
Eeab11
Eeab13
Eeab14
Eeab15
Eeab16
Eeab17
Eeab18
Eeab19
Eeab20
Eeab21
Eeab25
Eeab26
Eeab28
Eeab29
Eeab30
Description
Enable heat reclaim 1
Enable heat reclaim 2
Composition of total request
Def.
No
No
HR1 only
Gas cooler lower limit admitted to activate heat reclaim
40.0
barg
Minimum time off between 2 activations Heat reclaim 1
30
min
Minimum time off between 2 activations Heat reclaim 2
30
min
Disable floating condensing by heat reclaim
No
YES | NO
No
YES | NO
Setpoint if HR2 is regulated by temperature
Kp if HR2 is regulated by temperature
Integral time if HR2 is regulated by temperature
Type of valve of first heat reclaim
Threshold to activate valve output HR2
Threshold to de-activate valve output HR2
Delay to activate valve output HR2
Enable pump of first heat reclaim
Selection of pump type of first heat reclaim
Delay to switch off pump HR2
Different type of pump regulation of first heat reclaim
On threshold:
Threshold to activate pump output HR2
Off threshold:
Threshold to de-activate pump output HR2
Pump Management Setpoint: Setpoint if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature
Kp:
Kp if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature
Integral time:
Integral time if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature
HR2 enable HR probe temp. Enable multiple measurements of temperature probe
Filter:
Number of sample
Number of samples
Maximum water temp. Alarm Maximum water temperature Alarm threshold
thresh:
Differential:
Differential for maximum water temperature Alarm threshold
Actions on HPV valve and gas Type of HPV setpoint increment
cooler fans setpoints done in:
Wait. Time to act:
En. GasCool.bypass:
Gas cooler bypass 3way
valve type:
Valve Mode
Values
YES | NO
YES | NO
None | Solo RC1 |
Solo RC2 | RC!+RC2
Enable heat reclaim activation by scheduler
On threshold:
Threshold to activate pump output HR1
Off threshold:
Threshold to deactivate pump output HR1
Pump Management Setpoint: Setpoint if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature
Kp:
Kp if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature
Integral time:
Integral time if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature
HR1 enable HR probe temp. Enable multiple measurements of temperature probe
Filter:
Number of samples
Number of samples
Max. water temp. Alarm
Maximum water temperature Alarm threshold
thresh:
Differential:
Differential for maximum water temperature Alarm threshold
HR2 Regulation type:
Different type of regulation of first heat reclaim
Setpoint
Kp:
Integral time:
HR2 Valve type:
Activation thr:
De-activat thr:
Activation delay:
En. Pump:
Pump type:
Pump delay off:
Pump regulation type:
U. of M.
ON | OFF | 0
| 10V
YES | NO
Modulating | ON
| OFF
5.0
0.0
55
1
120
No
%
%
°C/°F
%/°C
s
85
°C/°F
5
Temperat.
°C/°F
40
1
200
ON/OFF
10.0
5.0
30
No
°C/°F
%/°C
s
YES | NO
1…200
External Signal
Temperature
Digital Input
ON | OFF | 0| 10V
%
%
s
YES | NO
Modul. | ON| OFF
0
s
HR request
5.0
0.0
55
1
120
No
%
%
°C/°F
%/°C
s
85
°C/°F
5
Simultan.
Mode
°C/°F
Delay to start HPV setpoint increment
Enable Gas Cooler bypass
Gas cooler bypass 3way valve type
120
No
0/10
s
Bypass valve mode
ON/OFF
Eval. Time to byp:
Evaluation time to start GC bypass
Max receiver press.
Max receiver pressure to allow bypass
To allow byp:
HPV valve modul. Setp.min%: Min. HPV setpoint with heat reclaim total request upper setted threshold
HPV valve modul. Setp.100%: Max. HPV setpoint with heat reclaim total request equal to 100%
Time to min setp.:
Time to reach minimum setpoint
Incr. Step:
Value of incremental step between setpoint min& e setpoint 100%
Wait time:
Time each step
Gas cool. Fans modulat. Incr. Value of GC incremental step
Step:
Gas cool. Fans modulat. Wait Time each step
time:
Gas cool. Fans modulat. Max GC maximum offset
offset:
Gas cool. Fans modulat. Min. Minimum HR total request to start GC action
HR request:
Gas cool. Fans modulat. Diff.
Differential to decrease GC action
OFF:
Max decrease time of HPV
Time to decrease total HPV offset
offset:
Max decrease time of GC
Time to decrease total GC offset
offset:
Max t.close byp.
Time to close bypass valve
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
74
HR request |
Diff temperature
HR request |
Diff temperature
YES | NO
1…200
Simultaneous
Sequential mode
with Threasold
V
YES | NO
0 | 10 | ON | OFF
Modulating
ON | OFF
30
60.0
s
barg
75.0
85.0
60
0.5
60
1.0
barg
barg
s
barg
s
°C/°F
60
s
5.0
°C/°F
30.0
%
5.0
%
240
s
120
s
120
s
ENG
Mask index
Efa05
Efa06
Efa07
Efa08
Efa09
…
Efb05
Efb06
Efb07
Efb08
Efb09
Efb20
Efb10
…
Efb15
…
Efc05
Efc06
Efc07
…
Efd05
Efd06
Efd07
Display description
Min.HR request:
Diff.OFF:
JAN.funct.5
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
--------------Setpoint
Differential
High alarm
High alarm
Delay
Alarm type
Low alarm
Low alarm
Delay
Alarm type
…
JAN.modulat.1
JAN.modulat.2
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
--------------Setpoint
Differential
High alarm
High alarm
Delay
Alarm type
Low alarm
Low alarm
Delay
Alarm type
Out upper limit
Out lower limit
Cut-off enable
Cutoff Diff
Cutoff hys.
…
Out upper limit
Out lower limit
Cut-off enable
Cutoff Diff
Cutoff hys.
…
JAN Alarm 1
JAN Alarm 2
Regulation variable
Enable
Description
--------------Alarm type
Delay
…
Enable generic
scheduler funct.
JAN. scheduling connected
to common scheduler
Enable
TB1: --:-- -> --:--
Efe06/Efe07 (**)
…
Efe21
…
Efe29
…
Egaa01
Egaa02
Egab01
Def.
30.0
5.0
disable
--direct
--skip
--0.0 °C
0.0 °C
disable
0.0 °C
0
Normal
disable
0.0 °C
0
Normal
…
disable
disable
--direct
--Skip
--0.0 °C
0.0 °C
disable
0.0 °C
0
Normal
Disable
0.0 °C
0
Normal
100.0
0.0
NO
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
…
100.0
0.0
NO
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
…
disable
disable
----Salta
--Normal
0
…
disable
U. of M.
%
%
------------…
…
--…
s
----…
s
--…
--------------…
…
--…
s
----…
s
--%
%
--…
…
…
%
%
--…
…
…
--------------s
…
---
Values
disable | enable
…
direct | Reverse
…
skip | change
…
… (**)
… (**)
disable | enable
… (**)
0…9999
Normal | Serious
disable | enable
… (**)
0…9999
Normal | Serious
…
disable | enable
disable | enable
…
Direct | Reverse
…
skip | change
…
… (**)
… (**)
disable | enable
… (**)
0…9999
Normal | Serious
disable | Enable
… (**)
0…9999
Normal | Serious
0…100
0…100
NO | YES
… (**)
… (**)
…
0…100
0…100
NO | YES
… (**)
… (**)
…
disable | Enable
disable | Enable
…
…
Skip | Change
…
Normal | Serious
0…9999
…
disable | enable
Generic scheduler with the same days and special periods
NO
---
NO | YES
-----
--…
…
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Change
Enabling variable for generic scheduler function
Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (suction
line 1)
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (suction
line 1)
Time band change action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
JAN. A measure
Generic analog input A unit of measure selection
°C
---
…
------- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
...
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Modulating1
Status (display only)
…
DI
…
Generic probe A position
Generic probe A type
Generic probe A value
Generic probe A maximum limit
Generic probe A minimum limit
Generic probe A calibration
...
Generic stage 1 DO position
Status of generic stage 1 DO
Logic of generic stage 1 DO
Generic stage 1 function status
…
Generic modulating 1 AO position
Generic modulating 1 function output value
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 1)
…
B1
4...20 mA
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--…
0
0
…
---
…
----…
…
…
…
…
--------…
--%
…
---
Status
Logic
Function
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Device present
Deactivation when
fan power less than
ChillBooster fault DI status (line 1)
ChillBooster fault DI logic (line 1)
ChillBooster fault function status (line 1)
ChillBooster fault DO position (line 1)
ChillBooster fault DO status (line 1)
ChillBooster fault DO logic (line 1)
ChillBooster function status (line 1)
Enable ChillBooster function (line 1)
Fan capacity under which the ChillBooster is deactivated (line 1)
--NC
--…
--NO
--NO
95
----------------%
---, save changes
load previous
clear all
MONDAY...SUNDAY;
MON-FRI; MON-SAT;
SAT&SUN; ALL
°C | °F | barg |
psig | % | ppm
…
---, U1…U10 (****)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
0.0…100.0
…
---, 01…18, U1…
U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
NO | YES
0…100
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:--
Efe05
Description
Enable generic stage function 1
…
Enable generic stage function 5
Regulation variable for stage 1 generic function
Direct or reverse regulation
Enabling variable for stage 1 generic function
Enable description change
--------------Setpoint stage 1 generic function
Stage 1 generic function differential
High alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function
High alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function
High alarm delay for stage 1 generic function
High alarm type for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm delay for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm type for stage 1 generic function
…
Enable generic modulating function 1 management
Enable generic modulating function 2 management
Regulation variable for generic modulating function 1
Direct or reverse regulation
Enabling variable for generic modulating function 1
Enable description change
--------------Setpoint for generic modulating function 1
Differential for generic modulating function 1
High alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
High alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1
High alarm delay for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm type for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm delay for stage 1 generic function
Low alarm type for stage 1 generic function
Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1
Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1
Enable cut-off function for generic modulating function 1
Cut-off differential for generic modulating function 1
Cut-off hysteresis for generic modulating function 1
…
Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1
Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1
Enable cut-off function for generic modulating function 1
Cut-off differential for generic modulating function 1
Cut-off hysteresis for generic modulating function 1
…
Enable generic alarm function 1
Enable generic alarm function 2
Monitored variable for generic alarm function 1
Enabling variable for generic alarm function 1
Enable description change
Description
Priority type for generic alarm function 1
Delay for generic alarm function 1
…
Enable generic scheduler function
75
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Egab02
Egab03
Egab04
Ehb01
Ehb03
Ehb04
Ehb05
Ehb06
Eia01
…
Eia04
…
Eia06
…
Eia08
…
Eia15
Display description
Before activ. fans at
max for
Ext.tempThresh
Sanitary proc.
Start
Duration
Ext.tempThresh
Maint. req. Chillb. after
Maint time reset
Avoid simultaneous pulse
between lines
Delay
Force3 off L2 comps
for L1 fault
Delay
Activ. L1 comps for
L2 activ.
Delay
Force off L2 comps for L1 off
Enable minimum threshold
for act. of L1
Threshold
Enable pump down
Threshold
------- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
DI
Status
Logic
Function
…
--Status (display only)
…
DO Line relay
Logic:
…
DI On/Off parall.compr.
Description
Min. time for fans at maximum capacity before ChillBooster activation (line 1)
Def.
5
U. of M.
min
Values
0…300
External temperature threshold for ChillBooster activation (line 1)
Enable sanitary procedure (line 1)
Sanitary procedure starting time (line 1)
Sanitary procedure duration (line 1)
External temperature threshold for sanitary procedure activation (line 1)
Tempo massimo funzionamento ChillBooster (linea 1)
Reset tempo funzionamento ChilllBooster (linea 1)
Abilitazione inibizione spunti contemporanei compressori
30.0 °C
Disable
00:00
0
5.0 °C
200
NO
NO
…
----min
…
h
-----
…(**)
disable | Enable
…
0…30
…(**)
0…999
NO | YES
NO | YES
Ritardo tra partenze compressori linee diverse
Abilitazione forzatura OFF compressori linea 2 per guasto compressori linea 1
0
NO
s
---
0…999
NO | YES
Ritardo forzatura OFF compressori linea 2 per guasto compressori linea 1
Abilitazione forzatura ON compressori linea 1 per accensione compres. linea 2
0
NO
s
---
0…999
NO | YES
Ritardo forzatura ON compressori linea 1 per accensione compressori linea 2
Abilitazione forzatura OFF compressori linea 2 per off linea 1
Enable line 1 activation for DSS only when the suction pressure is greater than a minimum
threshold
Minimum threshold for line 1 activation for DSS
Enable pump down with at least one LT compressor active
Pump down threshold
RPRV tank pressure probe position
RPRV tank pressure probe type
RPRV tank pressure probe value
RPRV tank pressure probe maximum value
RPRV tank pressure minimum value
RPRV tank pressure probe calibration
…
HPV alarm digital input position
30
NO
NO
s
-----
0…999
NO | YES
NO | YES
--NO
1.5 barg
--4...20 mA
--60.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
---
…
--…
----…
…
…
…
…
---
HPV alarm digital input status
HPV alarm digital input logic
HPV alarm digital input status
…
HPV valve analog output position
HPV valve analog output value
…
DO position and On/Off Status Parallel compressor
Logic Parallel Compressor DO:
…
Digital input on/off parallel compressor
--NC
--…
0
0
…
…
NA
…
…
------…
--%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
… (**)
NO | YES
… (**)
---, U1…U10 (****)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, U1…
U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
0.0…100.0
…
---, 01…18 (****)
NC | NA
…
---, 01…18, U1…
U10 (****)
Open | Closed
NC | NA
Not active | Active
…
NO | YES
--%
optimiz. | custom
0.0…100.0
%
%
%
%
s
--…
…
…
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
0…9999
--… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
%/barg
s
%/barg
s
------…
s
…
%
…
… (**)
-999.9…999.9
0…100
0…9999
0…100
0…9999
NO | YES
0…99
NO | YES
… (**)
0…999
… (**)
0.0…100.0
… (**)
---
NO | YES
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
--s
----…
s
--%
NO | YES
0…999
NO | YES
NO | YES
… (**)
0…999
NO | YES
0.0…100.0
%
0.0…100.0
Status
Status parallel compressor DI (display only)
…
Logic
Logic parallel compressor DI
NA
Function (display only)
Function Status parallel compressor DI
…
…
…
…
…
Eib01
Enable HPV valve
HPV valve management enabled, or transcritical operation mode enabled
NO
management
Algorithm selection
Selection of the algorithm-tyep to apply to the calculation of the pressure setpoint
optimiz.
Eib02
Min HPV vale opening when Minimum opening of the HPV valve with the unit OFF
0
OFF
During ON
Minimum opening of the HPV valve with the unit ON
0
Max HPV valve opening
Maximum opening of the HPV valve
0
Max delta
Maximum variation per second allowed for the HPV valve output
0
Eib03
Pre-positioning
Opening of the HPV valve at start-up during pre-positioning
0
Prepos. time
Pre-positioning duration
0
Eib04
--Calculation algorithm graph
--Eib05 (Definition P100%
P 100% upper pressure limit
109.0 barg
of the points on Pmax
Pmax pressure for defining the upper proportional zone
104.0 barg
the graph, see
Pcritic
Pcritic optimal pressure calculated at the passage temperature between the intermediate zone 76.8 barg
mask Eib04)
and transcritical zone
T12
T12 limit temperature between the transcritical zone and intermediate zone
31.0 °C
T23
T23 temperature limit between the intermediate zone and subcritical zone
20.0 °C
Tmin
Tmin temperature for defining the lower proportional zone
6.0 °C
Eib06 (Definition T100%
T100% temperature for defining the complete opening zone of the valve
-10.0 °C
of the points on
Delta
Subcooling for optimized regulation
3.0 °C
the graph, see
Coeff.1
Coefficient for determining the customized line
2.5
mask Eib04)
Eib07
P1
Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve
5 %/ barg
I1
Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve
60
PHR
Prop. gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery
5 %/ barg
IHR
Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery
60
Eib08
Enable HPV setpoint filter
Enabling of the filter action on the HPV valve setpoint
NO
Number of samples
Number of samples
5
Eib09
Enable mgmt of HPV with HR Enabling of the various management of the HPV valve during heat recovery activation
NO
HR setp.
Setpoint regulation of the HPV valve during heat recovery
90.0 barg
Post HR Dt
Time scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery
0.1
Post HR DP
Pressure scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery
1.0 barg
Eib10
HPV valve safety position
HPV valve safety position
50.0
Eib11
Gas cooler temp delta with Offset to be applied to the external temperature in the event of gas cooler pressure probe
0.0 °C
probe error
error
Eib12
Enable HPV safeties from tank HPV valve safety procedure enabling
NO
pressure
Eib13
High tank pressure threshold High tank pressure threshold
40.0 barg
Max tank pressure
Maximum tank pressure allowed
45.0 barg
HPV set.incr.
Maximum offset to add to the HPV setpoint when the tank pressure exceeds the high
10.0 barg
pressure threshold
Eib14
Low tank pressure threshold Low tank pressure threshold
32.0 barg
Min tank pressure
Minimum tank pressure allowed
27.0 barg
HPV set.decr.
Maximum offset to subtract from the HPV setpoint when the tank pressure goes below the
10.0 barg
low pressure threshold
Eib15
Force close with comp OFF Enable HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off
NO
Delay clos. with comp. OFF HPV valve closure delay when all compressors on line 1 are off
10
Eib16
Regul. in subcritical zone
Enabling the regulation of the gas cooler in the subcritical zone
NO
Eib17
Enable
Enable warning func. when the gas cooler pressure is too far from the setpoint for the set time NO
Delta
Difference between the gas cooler pressure and the setpoint which generates the warning
30.0 barg
Delay
Delay time before generating the warning
30
Eib18
Enable RPRV valve mgmt
Enable RPRV valve mgmt
NO
Eib19
Min RPRV vale opening
Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit ON
10.0
when ON
During OFF
Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit OFF
10.0
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
76
ENG
Mask index
Eib20
Eib21
Eib22
Eib23
Eib24
Eib25
Eib27
Eib28
Eib31
Eib32
Eib35
Eib40
Eic01
Eic02
Eic03
(Valvola HPV)
Eic04
(Valvola HPV)
Eic05
(Valvola RPRV)
Eic06
(Valvola RPRV)
Display description
Pre-positioning
Prepos. time
Max RPRV valve opening
Max delta
CO2 rec. pressure setpoint
Gain
Int time
RPRV valve safety position
Force close with comp OFF
Delay clos. with comp. OFF
Threshold
Diff.
Delay
Reset
Swith-off comp.
Enable parallel compressor:
RPRV opening:
Delay:
Min g.c.temp.:
Receiver pressure threshold
Time
Var. delta
Max. HPV valve opening
percentage
Max. delta
Min on time:
Min off time:
Min time to start same
compressor:
RPRV offset with par. compr.
On:
Par. Comp. ON Rising time
RPRV:
Par. Comp. Off Falling time
RPRV:
HPV Valve
RPPV Valve
EVD address
Valves routing
Description
Opening of the RPRV valve at start-up during pre-positioning
Pre-positioning duration
Maximum opening of the RPRV valve
Maximum variation allowed for the HPV valve output
Regulation setpoint for the pressure for the CO2 receiver
Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve
Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve
RPRV valve safety position
Enable RPRV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off
RPRV valve closure delay when all compressors on line 1 are off
Receiver high pressure threshold alarm
Receiver high pressure differential alarm
Receiver high pressure alarm delay
Receiver high pressure alarm reset type
Enable compressor shutdown when high pressure receiver alarm occurs
Enable parallel compressor
RPRV opening to allow parallel compressor
Delay on parallel compressor activation
Minimum GC temperature to allow parallel compressor
Threshold pressure for the gas cooler when the Heat Reclaim is ON
Time during which this threshold remains active
Allowed variation
HPV valve maximum opening
Def.
50.0
5
100.0
10.0
35.0 barg
20 %/barg
60
50.0
NO
10
45.0 barg
5.0 barg
30
manual
NO
NO
30
10
15
------0
%
s
°C/°F
------%
HPV valve maximum variation per second
Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min on time
Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min off time
Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min time to start same compressor
0
30
30
60
%
s
s
s
Increment of RPRV setpoint during parallel compressor regulation
2
barg
Rising time of RPRV setpoint
0
s
Falling time of RPRV setpoint
20
s
Enable EVS management of HPV valve
Enable EVS management of HPV valve RPRV
Driver address managed in FBUS from pRack
Valve type driver association
enable
enable
198
---
---------
---
…
Ebba01
…
Values
0.0…100.0
0…9999
0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
… (**)
0…100
0…9999
0.0…100.0
NO | YES
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
0…9999
manual | auto
NO | YES
YES | NO
0…999
------0.0…100.0
0.0…100.0
enable | disable
enable | disable
0..207
Single A->HPV
Single A->RPRV
Twin A->RPRV
B->HPV
Twin A->HPV
B->RPRV
connected
not connected
CAREL EXV,
CUSTOM, Danfoss
CCMT, Danfoss
ICMTS (0-10V)
CAREL EXV, CUSTOM,
Danfoss ETS 400,
Danfoss ETS 250,
Danfoss ETS 100B,
Danfoss ETS 50B,
Danfoss ETS 12.5-25B,
Danfoss CCM 40
Danfoss CCM 10-2030 Danfoss ICMTS
(0-10V)
EVD Status
Driver connection to pRack status
---
HPV Valve type
HPV valve type
CAREL EXV ---
RPRV Valve type
RPRV valve type
CAREL EXV ---
Min. steps
Max. steps
closing steps
Nom. step rate
Move current
Holding current
Duty Cycle
Opening sincre
Closing sincre
Em. closing speed
Min. steps
Max. steps
closing steps
Nom. step rate
Move current
Holding current
Duty Cycle
Opening sincre
Closing sincre
Em. closing speed
Minimum valve step number
Maximum valve step number
Valve closing steps
Valve nominal speed
Nominal current
Holding current
Valve duty cycle
Opening position synchronization
Closing position synchronization
Valve emergency closing speed
Minimum valve step number
Maximum valve step number
Valve closing steps
Valve nominal speed
Nominal current
Holding current
Valve duty cycle
Opening position synchronization
Closing position synchronization
Valve emergency closing speed
50
480
500
50
450
100
30
YES
YES
150
50
480
500
50
450
100
30
YES
YES
150
step
step
step
step/s
mA
mA
%
---------step/s
step
step
step
step/s
mA
mA
%
---------step/s
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
1…2000
0…800
0…250
0…100
YES | NO
YES | NO
1…2000
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
1…2000
0…800
0…250
0…100
YES | NO
YES | NO
1…2000
B1
4...20 mA
-----
---, U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
| 0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HTNTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
NO | YES
0…1 (analog. output)
0…2 (digital outputs)
NO (digital outputs)
YES (analog. output)
…
---, 01…18 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Eaba04
--Oil temperature probe position (line 2)
--Oil temperature probe type (line 2)
…
Eabb04
U. of M.
%
s
%
%
…
%/barg
s
%
--s
…
…
s
-----
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
Enable com.cool.
Number of oil pumps
Oil temperature value (line 2)
Maximum oil temperature value (line 2)
Minimum oil temperature value (line 2)
Oil temperature probe calibration (line 2)
…
Enable common oil cooling (line 2)
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
YES
0
…
…
…
…
…
-----
Enable pump out.
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 2)
YES
---
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
…
Subcooling DO valve position (line 2)
Subcooling DO valve status (line 2)
Subcooling DO valve logic (line 2)
Status of the subcooling valve function (line 2)
…
…
…
--NO
--…
…
--------…
77
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Ebbb01
Display description
Subcooling contr.
---
Description
Enable subcooling function (line 2)
Subcooling control type (line 2)
Threshold
Subcooling (display only)
…
-----
Threshold for subcooling activation (line 2)
Subcooling value (line 2)
…
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 2)
Def.
U. of M.
NO
--Temp.
--Cond&Liqu.
0.0 °C
…
0.0 °C
…
…
…
B1
--4...20 mA ---
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
Economizer
Comp.Power Thresh.
Cond.Temp.Thresh.
Discharge Temp.Thresh.
…
-----
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Enable economizer function (line 2)
Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
…
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
NO
0
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
…
B1
4...20mA
…
…
…
…
…
--%
…
…
…
-----
…
Eeba02
--- (display only)
Max limit
Min limit
Calibration
…
Liquid inj.
Threshold
Differential
…
DI
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 2)
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Enable liquid injection function (line 2)
Liquid injection setpoint (line 2)
Liquid injection differential (line 2)
…
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
Disabled
70.0 °C
5.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
--…
…
…
---
Eebb01
…
Egba01
Status
Logic
Function
Enable heat rec.
…
DI
Heat recovery from digital input DI status (line 2)
Heat recovery from digital input DI logic (line 2)
Heat recovery from digital input function status (line 2)
Enable heat recovery function (line 2)
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 2)
--NC
--NO
…
---
--------…
---
--NC
--…
NO
95
------…
--%
Values
NO | YES
Temp. Cond&Liquid
only Liquid Temp.
-9999,9…9999,9
-999,9…999,9
…
--- | U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HTNTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
NO | YES
0…100
-999,9…999,9
-999,9…999,9
…
---, U1…U10 (****)
--- | NTC | PT1000
| 0...1 V | 0...10 V |
4...20 mA | 0...5 V |
HTNTC
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…
Disabled | abled
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, U1…
U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
NO | YES
…
--- | 01…18
U1…U10 (****)
closed | open
NC | NO
not active | active
…
NO | YES
0…100
…
…
…
…
Ecba01
…
Ecbb04
…
Edba01
…
Edbb01
…
Egbb01
…
Status
ChillBooster fault DI status (line 2)
Logic
ChillBooster fault DI logic (line 2)
Function
ChillBooster fault function status (line 2)
…
…
Device present
Enable ChillBooster function (line 2)
Deactivation when fan power Fan capacity under which the ChillBooster is deactivated (line 2)
less than
…
…
Tab. 7.f
Mask index
Display description
F.settings
Faaa01
Summer/Winter
Special days
Closing per.
Faaa02
Start
End
Faaa03
Day 1
…
…
Faaa04
Day 10
Faaa05
P1
--…
P5
--Faab01
Date format
Faab02
Faab03
Faab04
Faab05
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
Enable summer/winter management
Enable special days management
Enable closing period management
Summer start date
Summer end date
Special day 1 date
…
Special day 10 date
P1 closing period start date
P1 closing period end date
…
P5 closing period start date
P5 closing period end date
Date format
NO
NO
NO
------…
------…
----DD/MM/
YY
------------…
------…
-------
NO | YES
NO | YES
NO | YES
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
…
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
…
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
01 | JAN…31 | DEC
---DD | MM | YY
MM | DD | YY
YY | MM | DD
…
…
Monday… Sunday
disable | enable
0…240
…
…
…
NO | YES
Hour and minutes
Date
Day of the week calculated from the date
Enable daylight savings time
offset time
Daylight savings time starting week, day, month and time
Daylight savings time ending week, day, month and time
Current language
Disable the change language screen at startup
…
…
…
disable
60
…
…
english
YES
…
…
…
----…
…
-----
Fb03
Hour
Date
Day (display only)
Daylight savings time
Transition time
Start
End
Language
Disable language mask at
startup
Countdown
Main mask selection
Starting value for countdown, time change language screen active
Main screen selection
60
Linea 1
s
---
Fb04
Probes Configuration
Enable main screen configuration in terms of probes and values displayed
don’t
--configure
don’t
--configure
L1 - Suction barg
L2 - Suction barg
[Empty]
--GC OUT
°C/°F
temp
Gas cool. barg
L1 - Compr %
L2 - Compr %
L1 - Fans %
HPV
%
Fb01
Fb02
Info Configuration
Fb05* *refers to L1 - Suction
double lines and L2 - Suction
GC configuration [Empty]
at the start-up
GC out temp
Fb09
Fb10
Gas cool.
I1% value
I2% value
I3% value
I4% value
Enable main screen configuration in terms of icons displayed
Suction pressure L1
Suction pressure L2
Free to display new value
Gas cooler outlet temperature
Gas cooler pressure
Activation status of first control value
Activation status of second control value
Activation status of first control value
Activation status of second control value
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
78
0…60
Line 1 | Line 2
Double suction |
Double cond.
configure |
don’t configure
configure |
don’t configure
main probes available
main probes available
main probes available
main probes available
main probes available
main status available
main status available
main status available
main status available
ENG
Mask index
Fca01
Fd01
Fd02
Fd03
Display description
Address
Protocol
Description
Address of the supervisory system (line 1)
Supervisor communication protocol (line 1)
Def.
U. of M.
196
--Carel slave --local
Baudrate
Insert password
Supervisor communication speed (line 1)
Password
Current password level
19200
0000
---
-------
NO
0000
1234
1234
NO
Disabled
OFF
0
--------------%
196
pRack
manager
-----
19200
---
Logout
Logout
User
User password
Service
Service password
Manufacturer
Manufacturer password
Enable CpCOe
Enable expansion card
Offline pattern
Enable output configuration when offline
Digital Output pattern 1: … 6: Digital output status when expansion card offline
Universal Input pattern
Analogue output status when expansion card offline
UI01..UI10
Fda01
Fda02
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Fcb01
Address
Address of the supervisory system (line 2)
Protocol
Supervisor communication protocol (line 2)
Baudrate
Supervisor communication speed (line 2)
Values
0…207
--, CAREL SLAVE
LOCAL, CAREL SLAVE
REMOTE,
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
1200…19200
0…9999
User | Service |
Manufacturer
NO | YES
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
YES | NO
Abled | Disabled
ON | OFF
0…100
0…207
---, CAREL SLAVE
LOCAL, CAREL SLAVE
REMOTE,
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
1200…19200
Tab. 7.g
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
NO
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
0
--…
…
s
NO | YES
… (**)
0.0…99,9
0…999
NO
---
NO | YES
0.0 barg
NO
…
---
0.0…99,9
NO | YES
0.0 barg
3
60
…
--h
0.0…99,9
1…5
0…999
NO
AUTO
10
60
20
120
----s
s
s
min
NO | YES
AUTO | MAN
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
G.Safeties
Gba01
Gba02
Enable prevent
Enable high pressure condensing prevent (line 1)
Setpoint
High pressure condensing prevent threshold (line 1)
Differential
High pressure condensing prevent differential (line 1)
Decrease compressor power Decreasing compressor capacity time (line 1)
time
Enable heat recov. as first
Enabling heat recovery as first stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1)
prevent step
Offset HeatRecov
Offset between heat recovery and prevent setpoint (line 1)
Enable ChillB. as first prevent
Enable ChillBooster as first stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1)
step
Chill. offset
Offset between ChillBooster and prevent setpoint (line 1)
Max. num prevent
Max number of prevent before locking compressors (line 1)
Prevent max number
Prevent
max number evaluation time
evaluation time
Reset automatic prevent
Reset maximum number of prevent (line 1)
Common HP type
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 1)
Common HP delay
Common high pressure delay (line 1)
Common LP start delay
Common low pressure delay at startup (line 1)
Common LP delay
Common low pressure delay during operation (line 1)
Time of semi-automatic
Number of LP interventions evaluation time (line 1)
alarm evaluation
Numer of retries before alarm Number of LP interventions in the period after which the alarm becomes a manual reset
becomes manual (line 1)
(line 1)
Liquid alarm delay
Liquid level alarm delay (line 1)
Oil alarm delay
Common oil alarm delay (line 1)
Output relay alarm activation Selection of output relay alarm activation with active alarms or alarms not reset
with
Gba03
Gba04
Gba05
Gca01
Gca02
Gca03
Gca04
Gca05
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Gbb01
Enable prevent
Enable high pressure condensing prevent (line 2)
…
…
…
Gcb01
Common HP type
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 2)
Common HP delay
Common high pressure delay (line 2)
…
…
…
5
---
0…999
0
0
alarms
active
s
s
0…999
0…999
alarms active
alarms no reset
NO
…
AUTO
10
…
--…
--s
…
NO | YES
…
AUTO | MAN
0…999
…
Tab. 7.h
Mask index
H.Info
H01 (display
only)
H02 (display
only)
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
Ver.
Bios
Boot
Board type
Size
FLASH mem
RAM
Built-in type
Cycle time
Software version and date
Bios version and date
Boot version and date
Hardware type
Hardware size
Flash memory size
RAM memory size
Built-in display type
Number of cycles per second and cycle time software
…
…
…
…
…
---------
--…
--…
--…
--…
--…
kB
…
kB
…
--None | pGDE
cicli/s / ms …
Tab. 7.i
Mask index
Display description
Description
Def.
U. of M.
Values
Ib01
Type of system
Type of system
Aspiraz +
Condens.
---
Ib02
Ib03
Units of meas.
Compressor type
Units of measure
Type of compressors (line 1)
°C/barg
Recriproc.
-----
Ib04
Number of compressors
Number of alarms for each
compressor
Number of compressors (line 1)
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
2/3 (*)
1
-----
Suction
Condenser
Suction + Condenser
°C | barg | °F | psig
Recriprocating |
Scroll
1…6 | 12 (*)
0…4 | 7 (*)
I.Setup
79
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Mask index
Ib05
Display description
Modulate speed device
Description
Modulating device for first compressor (line 1)
Def.
None
Ib30
Compress. size
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Same size& --Same
Partial.
YES
10.0
…
NO
--YES
100
--kW
…
--kW
--%
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
Same size
…
--kW
--…
-----
YES
--…
NO
---
--kW
…
--kW
Ib34
U. of M.
---
Values
None |
Inverter
--- | Digital scroll(*)
--- | Continuous (*)
Same size &Same
Partial.
Same size &
different Partial.
Define sizes
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
NO | YES
100 | 50/100 |
50/75/100 |
25/50/75/100 |
33/66/100
…
NO | YES
S1…S4
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
Same size
Define sizes
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1)
Ib11
C01
…
C12
Compress. size
Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
Size for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Ib16
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
Ib20
--C01
…
C06
Compress. size
Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
Size for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
S1
…
--Same size
--…
-----
Ib21
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation
Units of measure
Refrigerant
Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
Size for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Units of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction line 1)
YES
--…
NO
--S1
…
S1
Pressure
barg
R744
--kW
…
--kW
--…
---------
Regulation type
Compressor regulation type (line 1)
Dead zone ---
Enable integral time action
Setpoint
Differential
Configure another suction
line
Dedicated pRack board for
suction line
Compressor type
Enable integral time for proportional regulation of suction line (line 1)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
Differential (suction line 1)
Second line configuration
NO
3,5 barg
0,3 barg
NO
--…(**)
…(**)
---
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
Same size
Define sizes
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
Pressure | Temper.
…
R22
| R134a
R404A | R407C
R410A | R507A
R290 | R600 R600a
| R717
R744 | R728
R1270 | R417A
R422D | R413A
R422A | R423A
R407A | R427A
R245Fa | R407F | R32
proportion. band
Dead zone
NO | YES
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
Suction lines in different boards
NO
---
NO | YES
Recriprocating |
Scroll
1…12
0…4
Ib35
Ib36
--Ib17
Ib22
Ib40
Ib41
Ib42
Ib43
Ib45
Ib50
Type of compressors (line 2)
Recriproc.
---
Number of compressors (line 2)
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
3
1
-----
Ib52
Number of compressors
Number of alarms for each
compressor
Modulate speed device
Modulating device for first compressor (line 2)
None
---
Ib70
Compress. size
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Same size& --Same
Partial.
Ib74
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
YES
--…
NO
--YES
100
--kW
…
--kW
--%
…
S46
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
Size for compressor 6 (line 1)
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
…
--kW
--…
---
Ib51
Ib75
Ib76
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
80
None | Inverter
--- | Digital scroll(*)
Same size &Same
Partial. |
Same size &
different Partial. |
Define sizes
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
NO | YES
100 | 50/100 |
50/75/100 |
25/50/75/100 |
33/66/100
…
NO | YES
S1…S4
S1…S4 | INV
…
S1…S4
ENG
Mask index
Ib60
Display description
Compress. size
Description
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Def.
Same size
U. of M.
---
Ib61
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation
Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1)
…
Size for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
YES'
--…
NO
--S1
…
S1
Pressure
--kW
…
--kW
--…
-----
Units of measure
Refrigerant
Units of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction line 1)
barg
R744
-----
Ib62
Ib80
Ib81
Regulation type
Compressor regulation type (line 1)
Dead zone ---
Enable integral time for proportional regulation of suction line (line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
Differential (suction line 2)
Suction and condensing lines on different boards, that is condensing line on dedicated
board
Number of fans (line 1)
Fan modulating device (line 1)
NO
3,5 barg
0,3 barg
NO
--…(**)
…(**)
---
Ib91
Ib54
Enable integral time action
Setpoint
Differential
Dedicated pRack board for
cond. line
Number of fans
Modulate speed device
3
None
-----
Ib93
Regulation
Fan regulation by pressure or temperature (line 1)
Pressure
---
Units of measure
Refrigerant
Units of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (condensing line 1)
barg
R744
-----
Regulation type
Fan regulation type (line 1)
---
Enable integral time action
Setpoint
Differential
Configure another condens.
line
Number of fans
…
Differential
Type of system
Enable integral time for proportional regulation
Setpoint without compensation (condens. line 1)
Differential (condensing line 1)
Configuration of a second condensing line
Banda
proporz.
NO
12.0 barg
2.0 barg
NO
Ib82
Ib90
Ib94
Ib95
Ib96
Ib1a
…
Ib1e
Ic01
Unit of measure
Number of suction lines
Suction line in separate boards
Ic05
Units of measure
Number of suction lines
Dedicated pRack board for
suction line
Compressor type
Type of compressors (line 1)
Recriproc.
---
Ic06
Number of compressors
Compressor type
Number of compressors (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 2)
4
Recriproc.
-----
Number of compressors (line 2)
System condensing line number
Number of fans (line 1)
Number of fans (line 2)
Condensing lines in separate boards
0
1
4
0
NO
-----------
Recriprocating |
Scroll
1…6/12 (*)
Recriprocating |
Scroll
1…6
0…2
0…16
0…16
NO | YES
pLAN boards needed for the selected configuration
Save Manufacturer configuration
Install Manufacturer configuration
Install default Carel configuration
--NO
NO
NO
---------
--NO | YES
NO | YES
NO | YES
Number of compressors
Condenser line number
Line 1
Line 2
Ic09
Dedicated pRack board for
cond. line
Ic10 (solo visual.) Boards needed
Id01
Save configuration
Load configuration
Id02
Reset Carel default
Ic07
Ic08
--…
…(**)
---
0…16
None | Inverter
Contr. taglio di fase
Pressure |
Temperature
…
R22
| R134a
R404A | R407C
R410A | R507A
R290 | R600
R600a | R717
R744 | R728
R1270 | R417A
R422D | R413A
R422A | R423A
R407A | R427A
R245Fa | R407F | R32
Banda proporz. |
Dead zone
NO | YES
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
3
…
2.0 barg
Aspiraz. +
Conden.
°C/barg
1
NO
Ic02
Ic03
Ic04
Number of fans (line 2)
…
Differential (condensing line 2)
Type of system
--…(**)
…(**)
---
Values
Same size | Define
sizes
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO | YES
0.0…500.0
S1…S4 | INV
…
S1…S4
Pressure
Temperature
…
R22
| R134a
R404A | R407C
R410A | R507A
R290 | R600 R600a
| R717
R744 | R728
R1270 | R417A
R422D | R413A
R422A | R423A
R407A | R427A
R245Fa | R407F | R32
Proportion. band
Dead zone
NO | YES
…(**)
…(**)
NO | YES
-------
0…16
…
…(**)
Suction Condenser
Aspiraz. + Conden.
°C/barg | °F/psig
0…2
NO | YES
Tab. 7.j
(*) According to compressor type
(**) According to unit of measure selected
(***) According to compressor manufacturer, refer to the related paragraph.
(****) According to hardware size
81
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
7.2 Alarm table
pRack pR300T can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital inputs and to system operation, similar to the pRack pR300. For each alarm, the
following are controlled:
• The actions on the devices, if necessary
• The output relays (one global and two with different priorities, if configured)
• The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present
• The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic)
• Any activation delay
The complete list of alarms for the pRack pR300T with the related information as described above, is reported below.
Code
Description
Reset
Delay
ALA**
C.pCOe offline no. 001 Offline
Automatic
0s
ALA01
ALA02
ALA03
ALA04
ALA05
ALA06
ALA07
ALA08
ALA09
ALA10
ALA11
ALA12
ALA13
ALA14
ALA15
ALA16
ALA17
ALA18
ALA19
ALA20
ALA21
ALA22
ALA23
ALA24
ALA25
ALA26
ALA27
ALA28
ALA29
ALA30
ALA31
ALA32
ALA33
ALA34
ALA35
ALA36
ALA39
ALA40
ALA41
ALA42
ALA43
ALA44
Discharge temperature probe malfunction
Gas cooler pressure probe malfunction
Outside temperature probe error
Generic probe A malfunction, PLB1
Generic probe B malfunction, PLB1
Generic probe C malfunction, PLB1
Generic probe D malfunction, PLB1
Generic probe E malfunction, PLB1
Generic probe A malfunction, PLB2
Generic probe B malfunction, PLB2
Generic probe C malfunction, PLB2
Generic probe D malfunction, PLB2
Generic probe E malfunction, PLB2
Generic probe A malfunction, PLB3
Generic probe B malfunction, PLB3
Generic probe C malfunction, PLB3
Generic probe D malfunction, PLB3
Generic probe E malfunction, PLB3
Generic probe A malfunction, PLB4
Generic probe B malfunction, PLB4
Generic probe C malfunction, PLB4
Generic probe D malfunction, PLB4
Generic probe E malfunction, PLB4
Suction pressure probe malfunction
Suction temperature probe malfunction
Room temperature probe malfunction
Condensing pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Suction temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Gas cooler pressure backup probe malfunction
Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Common oil temperature probe malfunction
Common oil temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressor 1-6
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressor 1-6, line 2
Oil temperature probe malfunction, compressor 1-6, line 1
Compressor 1 oil temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Gas cooler outlet temperature probe malfunction
CO2 receiver pressure probe malfunction
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
ALA45
Gas cooler outlet temperature backup probe malfunction
Automatic
60 s
ALA55
ALA56
Discharge probe malfunction, line 1
Discharge probe malfunction, line 2
Automatic
Automatic
60 s
60 s
R2
ALA57
High/low discharge pressure, line 1
Automatic
Settable
R1
ALA58
ALB01
ALB02
ALB03
High/low discharge pressure, line 2
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
Low gas cooler outlet temperature from probe
Automatic
Semi-auto
Man/Auto
Automatic
Settable
Config.
Config.
Settable
R1
R1
R1
R1
ALB04
High gas cooler outlet temperature from probe
Automatic
Settable
R1
ALB05
ALB06
ALB07
ALB08
ALB09
ALB10
ALB11
ALB12
ALB13
ALB14
ALB15
ALB16
ALB17
ALB18
ALB21
ALB22
ALC90
Liquid level
Common oil differential
Common fan thermal protector
Low suction pressure from pressure switch, line 2
High condensing pressure from pressure switch, line 2
Low condensing pressure from probe, line 2
High condensing pressure from probe, line 2
Liquid level, line 2
Common oil differential, line 2
Common fan thermal protector, line 2
High suction pressure from probe
Low suction pressure from probe
High suction pressure from probe, line 2
Low suction pressure from probe, line 2
High pressure prevention
High pressure prevention, line 2
L1 - Generic comp. alarm
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Semi-auto
Man/Auto
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Man/Auto
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
R2
R2
Config.
R1
R1
R1
R1
R2
R2
Config.
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1 Config.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
82
Alarm relay Action
Outputs blocked in current status or
R1
according to pattern
R2
Related functions disabled
R1
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R1
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R1
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R1
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
R2
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled Related
R2 R2
functions disabled
Related functions disabled
"Low pressure -> fans stopped,
compressors remain on
High pressure -> fans on at 100%,
compressor shutdown"
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Fans forced to 0%
Fans forced to 100% and compressor
shutdown
Compressor shutdown, line 2
Compressor shutdown, line 2
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown, line 2
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
ENG
Code
ALC91
ALC92
ALC93
ALC94
ALC96
ALC97
Description
L1 - Compressor overload alarm
L1 - Compressor high pressure
L1 - Compressor low pressure
L1 - Compressor oil alarm
L2 - Compressor generic alarm
L2 - Compressor overload alarm
Reset
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Delay
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
ALC98
L2 - Compressor high pressure
Man/Auto
Config. Config.
ALC99
ALC9a
ALCad
ALCae
ALCaf
ALCag
ALCah
ALCai
ALCal
ALCam
AlCan
ALCao
AlCap
ALCaq
ALCar
ALF01
ALF02
ALG01
ALG02
ALG11
ALG12
ALG13
ALG14
ALG15
ALG16
ALG17
ALG18
ALG19
ALG20
ALG21
ALG22
ALG23
ALG24
ALG25
ALG26
ALG27
ALG28
ALG29
ALG30
ALG31
ALG32
ALG33
ALG34
ALH01
ALH02
ALO02
ALT01
ALT02
ALT03
ALT04
ALT07
ALT08
ALT09
ALT10
ALT11
ALT12
ALT13
ALT14
ALT15
L2 - Compressor low pressure
L2 - Compressor oil alarm
Digital Scroll™ oil sump high temperature
Digital Scroll™ high discharge temperature
Digital Scroll™ high oil dilution
Digital Scroll™ oil sump high temperature, line 2
Digital Scroll™ high discharge temperature, line 2
Digital Scroll™ high oil dilution, line 2
High discharge temperature, compressor 1-6
High discharge temperature, compressor 1-6, line 2
Compressor envelope
High compressor oil temperature, line 1
High compressor oil temperature, line 2
High oil temperature, compressor 1 to 6
Low oil temperature, compressor 1 to 6
Fan thermal protector
Fan thermal protector, line 2
Clock error
Extended memory error
High alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB1
High alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB2
High alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB3
High alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB4
Low alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB1
Low alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB2
Low alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB3
Low alarms generic thermostat 1- 5, PLB4
High alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB1
High alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB2
High alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB3
High alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB4
Low alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB1
Low alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB2
Low alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB3
Low alarms generic modulating 6 and 7, PLB4
Normal alarm generic functions 1/2, PLB1
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
ChillBooster fault
ChillBooster fault, line 2
pLAN malfunction
Compressor maintenance request
Compressor maintenance request, line 2
ChillBooster maintenance request
ChillBooster maintenance request, line 2
HPV valve alarm
RPRV valve alarm
Compressor 1 oil alarm
Compressor 2 oil alarm
Compressor 3 oil alarm
Compressor 4 oil alarm
Compressor 5 oil alarm
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Automatic
Automatic
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Man/Auto
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
60 s
60 s
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
60 s
0s
0s
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Config.
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
R2
R2
R1
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
R2
R2
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Compressor 6 oil alarm
Automatic
Settable
Not featured Related functions disabled
Low superheat alarm
Low superheat alarm, line 2
HPV valve opening different from set point warning
Settable
Settable
Automatic
Settable
Settable
-
Compressor shutdown, line 1
R1
R1
Compressor shutdown, line 2
Not featured Comp. shutdown, line 1 (can be
R1
enabled)
Not present Unit shutdown
Not present Unit shutdown
Compressors shutdown, except for
Not present
minimum capacity step
Compressors shutdown, except for
Not present
minimum capacity step, line 2
Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present -
ALT16
ALT17
ALT18
High receiver pressure
Settable
Settable
ALU01
ALU02
Configuration not allowed
Control probes absent
Automatic
Automatic
Not present
Not present
ALW01
High pressure prevent warning
Automatic
Config.
ALW02
High pressure prevent warning, line 2
Automatic
Config.
ALW03
ALW04
ALW05
ALW06
ALW07
ALW08
ALW09
ALW10
ALW11
Compressor inverter warning
Compressor inverter warning, line 2
Fan inverter warning
Fan inverter warning, line 2
Envelope warning: refrigerant not compatible with compressor series
Envelope warning: custom envelope not configured
Envelope warning: suction or condensing probes not configured
Low superheat warning
Low superheat warning, line 2
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
83
Alarm relay
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Action
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown due to alarm
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Compressor shutdown
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Compressor shutdown
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Fans off
Fans off
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
ChillBooster disabled
ChillBooster disabled
Unit shutdown
Safety procedures activated
Safety procedures activated
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Code
ALW12
ALW13
ALW14
ALW15
ALW16
ALW17
Description
ChillBooster working without outside probe warning
ChillBooster working without outside probe warning, line 2
Probe type configured not allowed warning
Error during auto-configuration warning
Oil receiver levels not configured correctly warning, line 1
Oil receiver levels not configured correctly warning, line 2
ALW18
Probe SX fault
ALW19
EEPROM damaged
ALW20
ALW21
Valve motor error
Driver OFFLINE
ALW22
Battery discharged
ALA02
ALA66
ALA49
ALA50
ALA48
ALA46
ALW32
ALB32
ALC51
ALC52
ALC95
ALC9b
ALT05
ALT06
ALT25
ALT19
ALT20
ALT21
ALT22
ALT23
ALT24
ALW23
ALW24
ALW30
ALW31
ALW34
ALW35
ALW36
ALW37
ALO04
ALO05
ALA60
ALA59
ALA61
ALA65
ALA91
ALAa2
ALAa3
ALA93
ALA94
ALA95
Broken gas cooler pressure probe
Receiver outlet temperature probe broken or disconnected
Heat recovery temperature probe broken or disconnected
Heat recovery temperature probe 2 broken or disconnected
Parallel compressor Shp low temperature Probe
Parallel compressor discharge pressure probe broken or disconnected
Parallel compressor discharge temperature probe broken or
disconnected
Heat recovery discharge temperature probe 2 broken or disconnected
SERIOUS common alarm from digital input
CO2 level alarm
Leakage detector alarm
Rotation - L1
Rotation - L2
HPV valve opening too different from feedback
RPRV valve opening too different from feedback
Parallel comp. oil solenoid management alarm
Compressor 1 oil solenoid management alarm L2
Compressor 2 oil solenoid management alarm L2
Compressor 3 oil solenoid management alarm L2
Compressor 4 oil solenoid management alarm L2
Compressor 5 oil solenoid management alarm L2
Compressor 6 oil solenoid management alarm L2
High temperature prevent warning
High temperature prevent warning, line 2
Alarm: heat recovery 1
Alarm: heat recovery 2
heat recovery 1 water inlet temperature probe broken
heat recovery 2 water inlet temperature probe broken
heat recovery 1, external 0-10 V signal fault
heat recovery 2, external 0-10 V signal fault
expansion board alarm
expansion board not compatible
Intercooler temperature probe broken or disconnected
L1 - Oil reserve probe broken or disconnected
parallel compressor alarm from DI
parallel compressor pLAN alarm
HPV, RPRV valve custom setting absent
high / low chiller water outlet temperature
high / low chiller water inlet temperature
heat recovery low differential temperature
Heat recovery temperature differential control disabled, probe absent
Flow switch alarm in the chilled water line. Unit shutdown
ALA96
Chiller frost protection alarm
ALA97
Chiller frost protection prevention alarm
ALA98
ALA99
ALAa0
ALAa1
ALA47
Reset
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Delay
0s
0s
Not present
Not present
-
Automatic
Not present
Replace driver /
contact service
automatic
manual
Replace the
battery
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Alarm relay
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
R2
R2
Action
Depends on “Probe SX alarm
Not present
management” parameter
Not present
Not present Total shutdown
Not present
5s
Not present Interruption
Not present Unit shutdown
Not present
Not present No effect
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
Serious
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Automatic
Settable
Normal
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
10s
Not present
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
10s
10s
10s
10s
Not present
Not present
10s
10s
Settable
Not present
Not present
Settable
Settable
Settable
10s
Settable
Settable, but
depends on
the control
water
temperature
Normal
Serious
Normal
Normal
Manual
related function disabled
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Serious
Serious
Normal
Normal
Serious
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Serious
related function disabled
related function disabled
Unit shutdown
Serious
Unit shutdown
Semi-automatic
Settable
Normal
Chiller water outlet malfunction
Chiller water inlet malfunction
Flow switch warning: pump off, but flow detected
High water inlet-outlet temperature delta (chiller)
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
10s
10s
Settable
Settable
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
ALAa4
Chiller frost protection probe malfunction
Automatic
10s
Normal
ALAa5
Max capacity probe L1: -Not configured - broken or disconnected
Automatic
10s
Normal
ALAa6
Max capacity probe L2: -Not configured - broken or disconnected
Automatic
Normal
ALAa7
Backup function active: valve failure -HPV -RPRV
Automatic
10s
See the
paragraph on
the backup
function
ALAa8
Config. Backup I/O absent /: -RPRV-HPV
Maximum number of supplementary function activations reached for HPV valve _ RPRV valve
ALAa9
related function disabled
See paragraph on chiller frost
protection
See the paragraph on the chiller probe
See the paragraph on the chiller probe
See paragraph on chiller frost
protection
See paragraph on maximum capacity
limit
Automatic
Automatic
Tab. 7.k
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
84
ENG
7.3 I/O Table
The list of pRack pR300T inputs and outputs is reported below.
Digital inputs
Line 1
Screen
Baa56
Baa57
Baada
Baa02
Baadl
Baa03
Baa04
Baa05
Baa06
Baa07
Baa08
Baa09
Baa10
Baa11
Baa12
Baa13
Baa14
Baa15
Baa17
Baa18
Baa19
Baa20
Baa21
Baa22
Baa23
Baa24
Baa25
Baa26
Baa27
Baa28
Baa29
Baa30
Baa32
Baa33
Baa34
Baa35
Baa36
Baa37
Baa38
Baa39
Baa40
Baa41
Baa42
Baa43
Baa44
Baa45
Baa47
Baa48
Baa49
Baa50
Baa51
Baa52
Baa53
Baa54
Baa55
Baa58
Baa59
Baa59
Baa59
Baaap
Baadb
Baaag
Baaar
Baa61
Baa62
Baa63
Baa64
Baa65
Baa66
Baa67
Baa68
Baa69
Baa70
Baa71
Baa72
Baa73
Baa74
Baa76
Baa77
Baa78
Baa79
Baa80
Baa81
Baa82
Baa83
Baa84
Baa85
Description
L1 - Common low pressure from pressure switch
L1 - Common high pressure from pressure switch
L1 - Compressor inverter warning
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 1
L1 - Parallel compressor alarm
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 5
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 1 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 5
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 2 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 5
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 3 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 4 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 5
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 5 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 3
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 4
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 5
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 6
L1 - Compressor 6 alarm 7
L1 - Compressor 7 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 7 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 8 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 8 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 9 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 9 alarm 2
L1 - Compressor 10 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 11 alarm 1
L1 - Compressor 12 alarm 1
L1 - Common oil alarm
L1 - Liquid level alarm
L1 - CO2 leak alarm
CO2 level alarm
L2 - Common low pressure
L2 - Compressor inverter warning
L2 - Common high pressure
L2 - Common oil alarm
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 3
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 1 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 3
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 2 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 3
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 3 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 3
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
85
Logic
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Channel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Screen
Baa86
Baa87
Baa88
Baa89
Baa91
Baa92
Baa93
Baa94
Baa95
Baa96
Baa97
Baa98
Baa99
baaaa
Baaab
Baaac
baaad
Baaae
Baaag
Baaah
Baaai
Baaaj
Baaak
Baaal
Baaam
Baaan
Baaao
BAAAS
Baadc
Baadf
Baaau
Baaav
Baaaw
Baaax
Baaay
Baaaz
Baaba
Baabb
Baabc
Baabd
Baabe
Description
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 4 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 3
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 5 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 3
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 4
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 5
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 6
L2 - Compressor 6 alarm 7
L2 - Compressor 7 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 7 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 8 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 8 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 9 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 9 alarm 2
L2 - Compressor 10 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 11 alarm 1
L2 - Compressor 12 alarm 1
L2 - Liquid level alarm
L1 - Fan inverter warning
L1 - High pressure prevention
L1 - Fan 1 overload
L1 - Fan 2 overload
L1 - Fan 3 overload
L1 - Fan 4 overload
L1 - Fan 5 overload
L1 - Fan 6 overload
L1 - Fan 7 overload
L1 - Fan 8 overload
L1 - Fan 9 overload
L1 - Fan 10 overload
L1 - Fan 11 overload
Baabf
Baabg
Baabh
Baabi
Baabj
Baabk
Baacz
Baacx
Baadd
Baabn
Baabo
Baabp
Baabq
Baabr
Baabs
Baabt
Baabu
Baabv
Baabw
Baabx
baaby
Baabz
Baaca
Baacb
Baacc
Baacd
Baace
Baadg
Baacf
Baacg
Baach
Baaci
Baacj
Baack
Baacy
Baacl
Baacm
Baacn
Baade
Baadf
Baadn
Baado
Baadp
Baadq
Baadr
Baaf1
Baadt
Baadh
Baadi
Baads
L1 - Fan 12 overload
L1 - Fan 13 overload
L1 - Fan 14 overload
L1 - Fan 15 overload
L1 - Fan 16 overload
L1 - Common fan thermal protector
Parallel compressor running
L1 - Chillbooster alarm from DI
L2 - Fan inverter warning
L2 - Fan 1 overload
L2 - Fan 2 overload
L2 - Fan 3 overload
L2 - Fan 4 overload
L2 - Fan 5 overload
L2 - Fan 6 overload
L2 - Fan 7 overload
L2 - Fan 8 overload
L2 - Fan 9 overload
L2 - Fan 10 overload
L2 - Fan 11 overload
L2 - Fan 12 overload
L2 - Fan 13 overload
L2 - Fan 14 overload
L2 - Fan 15 overload
L2 - Fan 16 overload
L2 - Common fan overload
L2 - Heat recovery activation request
L2 - Chillbooster alarm from DI
Status of generic digital input F
Status of generic digital input G
Status of generic digital input H
Status of generic digital input I
Status of generic digital input J
L1 - On/Off via digital input
L2 - On/Off via digital input
L1 - Set point compensation from digital input
L2 - Set point compensation from digital input
pRack automatic or manual operating status
HPV alarm from digital input
RPRV alarm from digital input
L1 - Heat recovery 1 activation from DI
L1 - Heat recovery 1 flow switch
L1 - Heat recovery 2 activation from DI
L1 - Heat recovery 2 flow switch
Heat recovery defrost DI
Common maximum oil level
Chiller water flow switch
Leakage detector alarm
CO2 level alarm
Serious common alarm
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Logic
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Channel
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes
Tab. 7.l
Line 2
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
86
ENG
Screen
Bac02
Bac02
Bac02
Bac03
Bac04
Bac05
Bac06
Bac07
Bac08
Bac08
Bac08
Bac10
Bac11
Bac12
Bac09
Bac13
Bac15
Bac15
Bac15
Bac16
Bac17
Bac18
Bac19
Bac20
Bac21
Bac21
Bac21
Bac22
Bac23
Bac24
Bac25
Bac26
Bac28
Bac28
Bac28
Bac29
Bac30
Bac31
Bac32
Bac33
Bac34
Bac34
Bac34
Bac35
Bac36
Bac37
Bac38
Bac39
Bac41
Bac41
Bac42
Bac43
Bac44
Bac45
Bac46
Bac46
Bac47
Bac48
Bac49
Bac50
Bac51
Bac51
Bac52
Bac53
Bac54
Bac55
Bac56
Bac56
Bac56
Bac57
Bac58
Bac59
Bac61
Bac61
Bac62
Bac63
Bac64
Bac65
Bac66
Bac66
Bac67
Bac68
Bac69
Bac70
Bac71
Bac73
Bac73
Bac73
Bac74
Bac75
Bac76
Bac77
Bac78
Bac79
Description
L1 - Compressor 1 line relay
L1 - Compressor 1 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 1 star relay
L1 - Compressor 1 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 1 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 1 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 1 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 1 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 2 line relay
L1 - Compressor 2 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 2 star relay
L1 - Compressor 2 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 2 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 2 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 2 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 2 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 3 line relay
L1 - Compressor 3 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 3 star relay
L1 - Compressor 3 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 3 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 3 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 3 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 3 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 4 line relay
L1 - Compressor 4 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 4 star relay
L1 - Compressor 4 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 4 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 4 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 4 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 4 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 5 line relay
L1 - Compressor 5 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 5 star relay
L1 - Compressor 5 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 5 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 5 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 5 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 5 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 6 line relay
L1 - Compressor 6 delta relay
L1 - Compressor 6 star relay
L1 - Compressor 6 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 6 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 6 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 6 valve 4
L1 - Compressor 6 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 7 line relay
L1 - Compressor 7 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 7 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 7 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 7 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 7 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 8 line relay
L1 - Compressor 8 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 8 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 8 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 8 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 8 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 9 line relay
L1 - Compressor 9 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 9 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 9 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 9 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 9 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 10 line relay
L1 - Compressor 10 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 10 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 10 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 10 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 10 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 11 line relay
L1 - Compressor 11 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 11 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 11 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 11 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 11 equalising valve
L1 - Compressor 12 line relay
L1 - Compressor 12 part winding relay
L1 - Compressor 12 valve 1
L1 - Compressor 12 valve 2
L1 - Compressor 12 valve 3
L1 - Compressor 12 equalising valve
L1 - Oil reserve digital output
L2 - Compressor 1 line relay
L2 - Compressor 1 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 1 star relay
L2 - Compressor 1 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 1 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 1 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 1 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 1 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 2 line relay
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
87
Logic
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
-NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Channel
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Screen
Bac79
Bac79
Bac80
Bac81
Bac82
Bac83
Bac84
Bac86
Bac86
Bac86
Bac87
Bac88
Bac89
Bac90
Bac91
Bac92
Bac92
Bac92
Bac94
Bac95
Bac96
Bac97
Bac98
Bacaa
Bacaa
Bacaa
Bacab
Bacac
Bacad
Bacae
Bacaf
Bacag
Bacag
Bacag
Bacah
Bacai
Bacaj
Bacak
Bacal
Bacan
Bacan
Bacan
Bacao
Bacap
Bacaq
Bacar
Bacas
Bacas
Bacat
Bacau
Bacav
Bacaw
Bacax
Bacax
Bacay
Bacaz
Bacba
Bacbb
Bacbc
Bacbc
Bacbd
Bacbe
Bacbf
Bacbg
Bacbh
Bacbh
Bacbi
Bacbj
Bacbk
Bacbl
Bacbm
Bacbm
Bacbn
Bacbo
Bacbp
Bacbq
Baceo
Bacbt
Bacbu
Bacbv
Bacbw
Bacbx
Bacby
Bacbz
Bacca
Baccb
Baccc
Baccd
bacce
Baccf
Baccg
Bacch
Bacci
bacck
Description
L2 - Compressor 2 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 2 star relay
L2 - Compressor 2 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 2 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 2 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 2 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 2 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 3 line relay
L2 - Compressor 3 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 3 star relay
L2 - Compressor 3 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 3 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 3 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 3 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 3 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 4 line relay
L2 - Compressor 4 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 4 star relay
L2 - Compressor 4 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 4 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 4 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 4 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 4 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 5 line relay
L2 - Compressor 5 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 5 star relay
L2 - Compressor 5 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 5 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 5 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 5 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 5 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 6 line relay
L2 - Compressor 6 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 6 star relay
L2 - Compressor 6 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 6 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 6 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 6 valve 4
L2 - Compressor 6 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 7 line relay
L2 - Compressor 7 delta relay
L2 - Compressor 7 star relay
L2 - Compressor 7 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 7 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 7 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 7 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 8 line relay
L2 - Compressor 8 part winding relay
L2 - Compressor 8 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 8 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 8 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 8 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 9 line relay
L2 - Compressor 9 part winding relay
L2 - Compressor 9 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 9 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 9 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 9 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 10 line relay
L2 - Compressor 10 part winding relay
L2 - Compressor 10 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 10 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 10 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 10 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 11 line relay
L2 - Compressor 11 part winding relay
L2 - Compressor 11 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 11 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 11 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 11 equalising valve
L2 - Compressor 12 line relay
L2 - Compressor 12 part winding relay
L2 - Compressor 12 valve 1
L2 - Compressor 12 valve 2
L2 - Compressor 12 valve 3
L2 - Compressor 12 equalising valve
L2 - Oil receiver
L1 - Fan 1 status
L1 - Fan 2 status
L1 - Fan 3 status
L1 - Fan 4 status
L1 - Fan 5 status
L1 - Fan 6 status
L1 - Fan 7 status
L1 - Fan 8 status
L1 - Fan 9 status
L1 - Fan 10 status
L1 - Fan 11 status
L1 - Fan 12 status
L1 - Fan 13 status
L1 - Fan 14 status
L1 - Fan 15 status
L1 - Fan 16 status
L1 - Heat recovery pump ON/OFF
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
88
Logic
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Channel
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes
ENG
Screen
Bacef
Baccl
Baccn
Bacco
Baccp
Baccq
Baccr
Baccs
Bacct
Baccu
Baccv
Baccw
Baccx
baccy
Baccz
Bacda
Bacdb
Bacdc
Bacde
Bacdf
Bacdg
Bacdh
Bacdi
Bacdj
Bacdk
Bacdl
Bacdm
Bacdn
Bacdo
Bacdp
Bacdq
Bacdr
Bacds
Bacdt
Bacdu
Bacdv
Bacdw
Bacdx
Bacdy
Bacdz
Bacea
Baceb
Bacec
Baced
Bacee
Bacef
Baceg
Baceh
BACEI
Bacej
Bac72
Bacep
Bacek
Bacel
Bacem
BACEN
Bacfa
Bacfb
Bacfd
Bacfc
Bacfd
Bacet
Baca1
Description
Parallel compressor line relay
L1 - Chillbooster status
L2 - Fan 1 status
L2 - Fan 2 status
L2 - Fan 3 status
L2 - Fan 4 status
L2 - Fan 5 status
L2 - Fan 6 status
L2 - Fan 7 status
L2 - Fan 8 status
L2 - Fan 9 status
L2 - Fan 10 status
L2 - Fan 11 status
L2 - Fan 12 status
L2 - Fan 13 status
L2 - Fan 14 status
L2 - Fan 15 status
L2 - Fan 16 status
L2 - Heat recovery pump ON/OFF
L2 - Chillbooster status
L1 - Generic function output stage 1
L1 - Generic function output stage 2
L1 - Generic function output stage 3
L1 - Generic function output stage 4
L1 - Generic function output stage 5
Active alarms
Generic alarm 1 status
Generic alarm 2 status
Generic scheduler function
L1 - Oil pump 1 status
L1 - Oil pump 2 status
L1 - Oil fan status
L2 - Oil pump 1 status
L2 - Oil pump 2 status
L2 - Oil fan status
L1 - Compressor 1 liquid injection status
L1 - Compressor 2 liquid injection status
L1 - Compressor 3 liquid injection status
L1 - Compressor 4 liquid injection status
L1 - Compressor 5 liquid injection status
L1 - Compressor 6 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 1 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 2 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 3 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 4 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 5 liquid injection status
L2 - Compressor 6 liquid injection status
Heartbeat
L1 - Forcing from BMS
L1 - Anti liquid return
L2 - Anti liquid return
L2 - Forcing from BMS
L1 - Subcooling status
L2 - Subcooling status
Normal alarm status
Serious alarm status
L1 - Heat recovery 1 status
L1 - Heat recovery 2 status
L1 - Heat recovery 3-way bypass valve
Heat recovery pump 2
Extra load
Chiller water pump
Chiller ExV valve
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Logic
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Channel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes
Tab. 7.m
Digital outputs
Screen
BAB01
Bab60
Bab02
Bab03
Bab75
Bab11
Bab04
Bab09
Bab61
Bab62
Bab70
Bab71
Bab63
Bab90
Bab13
Bab05
Bbb75
Bab48
Bab49
Bab64
Bab06
Bab07
Bab73
Bab14
Description
L1 - Suction pressure
L1 - Suction pressure probe compensation
L1 - Backup suction pressure probe
L1 - Suction temperature
L1 - Discharge pressure
L1 - Discharge temperature
L1 - Gas cooler pressure
L1 - Backup gas cooler pressure probe
L1 - Gas cooler outlet temperature
L1 - Backup gas cooler temperature probe
L1 - Gas cooler inlet temperature
L1 - Gas cooler set point compensation from analogue input
L1 - Oil reserve pressure
L1 - Temperature between heat recovery echangers 1 and 2
L1 - Heat recovery 1 temperature
L2 - Suction pressure
L2 - Discharge pressure
L2 - Discharge temperature
L1- Heat recovery 1 request from external 0/10 V signal
L2 - Suction set point compensation from analogue input
L2 - Suction pressure backup
L2 - Suction temperature
L2 - Intercooler temperature
L2 - Heat recovery 2 temperature
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
89
UOM
barg
°C
barg
°C
barg
°C
barg
barg
°C
°C
°C
barg
barg
°C
°C
barg
barg
°C
barg
barg
barg
°C
°C
°C
Logic
0-1V
0-1V
0-1V
NTC
4-20mA
NTC
----NTC
NTC
NTC
----NTC
NTC
0-1V
4-20mA
NTC
0-1V
0-1V
0-1V
NTC
NTC
NTC
Channel
-------------------------------------------------
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
0
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Offset
0
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-0
0
0
0
Notes
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Screen
Bab65
Bab18
Bab15
Bab16
Bab17
Bab20
Bab22
Bab24
Bab26
Bab28
Bab29
Bab30
Bab31
Bab32
Bab33
Bab34
Bab35
Bab36
Bab37
Bab38
Bab39
Bab40
Bab41
Bab42
Bab43
Bab44
Bab45
Bab46
Bab47
Bab66
Bab67
Bab68
Bab72
Bab91
Bab93
Bab94
Bab95
Bab96
Bab92
Bab65
Bab59
Bab97
Bab69
Bab76
Bab08
Bab10
Description
L2 - Oil reserve pressure
L2 - Heat recovery temperature probe
L1 - Outside temperature
Room temperature
L1 - Common oil temperature
L1 - Generic probe 1
L1 - Generic probe 2
L1 - Generic probe 3
L1 - Generic probe 4
L1 - Generic probe 5
L1 - Compressor 1 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 2 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 3 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 4 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 5 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 6 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 1 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 2 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 3 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 4 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 5 high discharge temperature
L2 - Compressor 6 high discharge temperature
L1 - Compressor 1 oil temperature
L1 - Compressor 2 oil temperature
L1 - Compressor 3 oil temperature
L1 - Compressor 4 oil temperature
L1 - Compressor 5 oil temperature
L1 - Compressor 6 oil temperature
L2 - Compressor 1 oil temperature
L1 - Receiver pressure
HPV opening feedback
RPRV opening feedback
L1 - HPV set point compensation from analogue input
L1- Heat recovery 1 water inlet temperature
L1 - Heat recovery 2 water outlet temperature
L1- Heat recovery 2 water inlet temperature
L1 - Heat recovery 2 request external 0/10 V signal
L1 - Gas cooler bypass temperature
L1 - Heat recovery 1 request external 0/10 V signal
Chiller water outlet temperature
Chiller water inlet temperature
Chiller water frost protection temperature
Temp. Subcooled liquid
L2 - Discharge pressure
L2 - Condenser pressure
L2 - Condenser backup probe
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UOM
barg
°C
°C
°C
°C
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
barg
°C
°C
°C
%
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
Logic
--NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
--------------------NTC
NTC
NTC
0-1V
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
Channel
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---0
----------
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---0
----------
Offset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Notes
Tab. 7.n
Analogue outputs
Screen
Description
Bad01
Bad02
Bad04
Bad05
Bad07
Bad25
Bad26
Bad20
Bad21
Bad22
Bad23
Bad24
bacck
Bad16
Bad10
Bad11
Bad12
L1 - Compressor 1 inverter output
L1 - Oil pump output
L2 - Compressor 1 inverter output
L2 - Oil pump output
L1 - Fan inverter output
HPV valve output
RPRV valve output
L1 - Heat recovery 1 pump output
L1 - Heat recovery 2 valve output
L1 - Heat recovery 2 pump output
L1 - Heat recovery 3-way bypass valve output
L1 - Heat recovery extra load
L1 - Heat recovery 1 valve output
Parallel compressor inverter output
L2 - Fan inverter output
L2 - Heat recovery analogue output
Generic modulating function 1 output
Bad13
Generic modulating function 2 output
L1 - Compressor 2 inverter output
L2 - Compressor 2 inverter output
Var. value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UOM Logic
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
%
0-10V
Channel
-----------------------------------------
Min
---------------------
Max
---------------------
Offset
---------------------
Notes
Tab. 7.o
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
90
ENG
8. ALARMS
pRack PR300T can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital
inputs and to operation of the system. For each alarm, the following are
controlled:
• The actions on the devices, if necessary
• The output relays (one global and two with different priorities, if
configured)
• The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present
• The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic)
• Any activation delay
The complete list of alarms, with the related information as described
above, is available in Alarm table.
Note: A maximum of 50 alarms can be logged; after this limit any
new events overwrite the oldest ones, which are therefore deleted.
8.2 Compressor alarms
The number of alarms for each compressor can be set during the
configuration phase using the Wizard or subsequently from branch C.a.e/
C.b.e of the main menu. The number of alarms is the same for all the
compressors on the same line.
8.1 Alarm management
All alarms feature the following behaviour:
• When an alarm is activated, the red LED flashes and the buzzer is
activated (where present); the output relays corresponding to the
global alarm and to any alarms with priority are activated (if configured)
• Pressing the (Alarm) button, the red LED stays on steady, the buzzer
is muted and the alarm screen is shown
• If there is more than one active alarm, these can be scrolled using
(Up)
(Down). This condition is signalled by an arrow at the bottom
right of the screen
• Pressing the
(Alarm) button again for at least 3 seconds
acknowledges the alarms manually, and these are cleared from the
display unless others are active (they are saved in the log)
8.1.1
Fig. 8.a
Note: The maximum number of alarms that can be configured for
each compressor depends not only on the type of compressor, but
also on the size of pRack and the number of compressors fitted.
After having selected the number of alarms (maximum 4), the settings
can be configured for each alarm, choosing a description from the
options shown in the table, the output relay, the type of reset, delay
and priority. The effect of the alarm on the devices is set and involves
stopping the compressor, except for the oil warning.
Priority
Possible descriptions for compressor alarms
For certain alarms, the alarm output relay can be set with two types of priority:
• R1: serious alarm
• R2: normal alarm
The corresponding relays, once configured, are activated when an alarm
with the corresponding priority occurs. For the other alarms, the priority
is fixed and is associated by default with one of the two relays.
8.1.2
Reciprocating or scroll
Generic
Overload
High pressure
Low pressure
Oil
Tab. 8.a
An example of a screen for selecting the description of the alarm is shown
in the figure:
Acknowledgement
The alarms can have manual, automatic or semiautomatic
acknowledgement:
• Manual: the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the
(Alarm)
button twice, the first time displays the corresponding alarm screen
and mutes the buzzer, the second (extended, for at least 3 seconds)
cancels the alarm (which is saved in the log). If the alarm is still active,
acknowledgement has no effect and the signal is shown again.
• Automatic: when the alarm condition ceases, the alarm is automatically
reset, the LED comes on steady and the corresponding screen remains
(Alarm) button is pressed and held; the alarm is
displayed until the
saved in the log.
• Semiautomatic: acknowledgement is automatic, until a maximum
number of activations in set time. If the number reaches the maximum
set, acknowledgement becomes manual.
For manual acknowledgement, the functions associated with the alarm
are not reactivated until acknowledgement has been completed, while
for automatic acknowledgement they’re reactivated as soon as the alarm
condition ceases.
8.1.3
Fig. 8.b
After having selected the ‘generic’ description, no other description can
be selected. In general, the descriptions are divided in:
• overload,
• oil,
• high pressure
• low pressure.
After a description has been selected for a certain group, descriptions
from a different group can not be selected for that alarm. For example,
generic only, or overload + oil, or rotation only or overload + high
pressure., etc. can be selected. Each alarm will have one alarm screen,
which will show all the descriptions associated to that alarm.
Log
The alarm log can be accessed:
• from branch G.a of the main menu
• by pressing the (Alarm) button and then (Enter) when there are
no active alarms
• by pressing (Enter) after having scrolled all the alarms.
Starting from version 3.3.0, the main alarms relating to the compressors
have been grouped together; specifically, the alarms can be configured
in the path: C.Compressors Æ d.Alarms Æ Cae01 (Fig.8.a). The screens
show which compressors (only those configured) will be shutdown
(and which not) when a specific alarm is activated (generic alarm, high
pressure..); for example, with 3 compressors and the first 2 with alarms,
the following will occur:
The alarm log screens show:
1. Order of activation (no. 01 is the oldest alarm)
2. Hour and date the alarm was activated
3. Short description
4. Main values recorded at the moment the alarm was activated (suction
pressure and condensing pressure).
91
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
• High suction pressure
• Low condensing pressure
• High condensing pressure
According to the number of alarms selected, the default associated
descriptions will be as shown in the table.
L1-Alarms
ALC90
One possible example for the low pressure alarms is shown in the figure:
L1-Generic alarm comp.
C01:
C02:
C03: -
LP
Pressure
Differential
Pressostat alarm
Further example:
Probe alarm
Fig. 8.c
L1-Alarms
ALC92
In addition, the high pressure alarm features a prevent function, available
by manually overriding the devices as well as using additional functions,
such as heat recovery and ChillBooster. Operation of the alarms and
prevent function is described below.
L1-High press.al.comp.
C01: C02: C03:
8.3.1
The same applies to the following alarms:
• L1 – Compressors overload alarm
• L1 – Compressors high pressure
• L1 – Compressors low pressure
• L1 – Compressors oil alarm
• L2 – Compressors generic alarm
• L2 – Compressors overload alarm
• L2 – Compressors high pressure
• L2 – Compressors low pressure
• L2 – Compressors oil alarm
This alarm features semiautomatic reset, and both the monitoring time
and the number of activations in the specified period can be set. If the
number of activations is higher, reset becomes manual.
In addition, the delay after which the alarm is activated on both start-up
and during operation can be set.
The delay at start-up only applies to unit start-up and not compressor
power-up.
Default descriptions based on the number of alarms
Number of alarms
1
2
3
4
Pressure alarms from pressure switch
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch
G.c.a/G.c.b of the main menu.
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
The low suction pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect of
stopping all the compressors without observing the various times,
therefore when the digital input configured as low pressure switch
is activated, all the compressors on the line affected are stopped
immediately.
Descriptions
Generic
Overload
HP-LP
Overload
HP-LP
Oil
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
The high condensing pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect
of stopping all the compressors without observing the various times
and forcing the fans on at maximum speed, therefore when the digital
input configured as high pressure switch is activated, all the compressors
on the line affected are stopped immediately and the fans operate at
maximum output.
Tab. 8.b
This alarm features manual or automatic reset, as configured by the user.
The delay after which the alarm is activated can also be set
Note: for oil alarms, special management is available whereby the
alarm is interpreted as an oil level alarm. When the alarm is
activated, a number of attempts are made to restore the level for a set
time before the alarm is signalled and the compressor stopped.
8.3.2
Pressure alarms from probe
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch
C.a.e/C.b.e of the main menu for the suction pressure and D.a.e/D.b.e for
the condensing pressure.
If a modulating device is used for the compressors, further alarms
become available:
• compressor inverter warning, common for the entire suction line,
when the device is an inverter
• oil sump temperature alarm, high discharge temperature and oil
dilution, for Digital Scroll™ compressors
For these types of alarms, reset is automatic and the activation threshold
and differential can be set, as well as the type of threshold, which may be
absolute or relative to the control set point. The figure shows an example
of setting the threshold to relative.
For each compressor, two alarm variables are sent to the supervisor, one
for each priority. As well as the alarm signal, the description of the alarm is
also sent to the supervisor, using the values shown in the table:
HP
The supervisor can interpret the variables sent by pRack PR300T and
provide the correct description of the alarm.
Pressure
Differential
Relative threshold
8.3 Pressure and prevent alarms
Setpoint
pRack PR300T can manage pressure alarms from a pressure switch or
probe, according to the following diagram.
Fig. 8.d
Alarms from pressure switch:
• Low suction pressure
• High condensing pressure
Note: for temperature control, the alarms from probe are managed
based on temperature even when pressure probes are fitted.
The effects of the different pressure alarms from probe are described
below.
Alarms from probe:
• Low suction pressure
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Alarm
92
ENG
Low suction pressure from probe
The low suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping all
the compressors, ignoring the times.
Pressure
HP by pressostat
High suction pressure from probe
The high suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing
all the compressors on, ignoring the control times, but observing the
compressor protection times.
HP by probe
Low condensing pressure from probe
The low condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping
all the fans, ignoring the times.
Prevent
Offset
Heat reclaim
or ChillBooster
High condensing pressure from probe
The high condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing
all the fans on and stopping all the compressors, ignoring the times. The
reference for the alarm will be the discharge pressure probe (Bab75 or
Bbb75), or if this is not configured, the gas cooler / intercooler pressure
probe (Bab04 and Dba39).
time
Fig. 8.e
8.3.4
8.3.3
High pressure prevention
High temperature prevention
Prevention by overriding compressors and fans
The parameters relating to the high temperature prevention function can
be set in branch G.b.a/ of the main menu.
pRack PR300T can manage 3 types of high condensing pressure
prevention actions, involving:
• overriding the compressors and fans
• activating heat recovery
• activating ChillBooster
Prevent by overriding the compressors and fans
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
of the main menu.
The effect of this type of prevent action is to force all the fans on at
maximum and switch all the compressors off, except for the minimum
capacity stage, ignoring the control times but observing the compressor
protection times. The minimum capacity stage means one compressor in
the case of compressors without capacity control and modulation devices,
or the minimum capacity stage for capacity-controlled compressors (e.g.
25%), or alternatively the minimum output of the modulation device in
the case of inverters, Digital ScrollTM.
As well as the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and the
activation differential, a compressor deactivation time can be set,
corresponding to the time needed to switch off all the compressors,
except for the minimum capacity stage.
In addition, both the monitoring time and the number of activations in
the specified period can be set. If the number of activations is higher,
reset becomes manual.
When enabling this function, a warning is shown that a compressor
discharge temperature probe needs to be configured, if this has not
already been done previously.
This function is designed to keep the common compressor discharge
temperature under control. If the temperature exceeds the set threshold,
all of the fans are forced on at maximum speed and all of the compressors
are switched off, except for the minimum capacity step.
The compressors are stopped without waiting for the control times,
however after the compressor protection times.
Minimum capacity step refers to one compressor for compressors without
capacity control and without modulating devices, or the minimum
capacity step for compressors with capacity control (e.g. 25%), or the
minimum capacity that the modulating device can deliver for inverter or
Digital Scroll (TM) compressors.
If there is a parallel compressor connected to the same board in the
system, this will also operate at the minimum capacity step. In addition
to the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and the activation
differential, a compressor deactivation time can also be set, corresponding
to the time required to switch off all of the compressors, except for the
minimum capacity step.
Furthermore, the evaluation time and the number of activations allowed
in a set time period can be set. If the number of activations is greater than
the value set, all of the compressors are switched.
Prevent by activating heat recovery
The parameters corresponding to this function can be set in branch
G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu, if the heat recovery function is present.
As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
When reaching the threshold, pRack PR300T activates the heat recovery
function, if the conditions allow.
Prevent by activating ChillBooster
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
of the main menu, if the ChillBooster function is present.
As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
When reaching the threshold, pRack PR300T force activates the
ChillBooster, if the conditions allow.
The following figure illustrates the activation thresholds for the prevent
function and the safety devices:
93
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
pRack PR300T can be connected to various supervisory systems,
specifically the Carel and Modbus communication protocols can be used.
For the Carel protocol, the PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO models
are available. In addition, pRack PR300T can be connected to the pRack
Manager commissioning software.
9.2 Commissioning software
pRack Manager is configuration and real-time monitoring software used
to check the operation of pRack PR300T, for commissioning, debug and
maintenance operations.
The software is available on the internet at http://ksa.CAREL.com in the
section “download à support à software utilities”.The installation includes,
in addition to the program, the user manual and the necessary drivers.
9.1 PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO
supervisory systems
pRack Manager can be used to set the configuration parameters, modify
the values of volatile and permanent variables, save graphs of the main
system values to file, manually manage the unit I/Os using simulation files
and monitor/reset alarms on the unit where the device is installed.
Connection to Carel PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisor
systems uses the RS485 card already fitted on some models of pRack
PR300T. For details on the models of card available, see Chapter 1.
Note: In generale tutte le schede pRack dovrebbero essere
dotate di scheda e collegamento alla supervisione.
pRack PR300T is able to virtualise all the inputs and outputs, both digital
and analogue, therefore each input and output can be overridden by
pRack Manager.
Three different models of PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO are
available, used to supervise system configurations with one or two lines:
• L1 – one line: can be used for system configurations with just one
suction and/or condenser line.
• L2 – one line: can be used for system configurations with two suction
and/or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by
separate boards.
• Two lines: can be used for system configurations with two suction and/
or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by the same
board.
pRack Manager manages <file name>.DEV files that contain the user
parameter configurations and that can be downloaded from the pRack
PR300T board and then subsequently uploaded.
To use the pRack Manager program, a serial converter output RS485 with
CVSTDUTLF0 (telephone connector) or CVSTDUMOR0 (3 pin terminal)
must be connected to the board.
The connection to pRack Manager can be made:
1. Via the RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
2. Via the BMS serial port with RS485 serial card and activating
the pRack Manager protocol by parameter on screen Fca01 or
connecting pRack Manager and selecting SearchDevice = Auto (BMS
or FB) on the “Connection settings” tab. In this case, the connection is
established after around 15-20 seconds.
Important: model L2 – One line must be used only in association
with model L1 – One line. For supervision of system configurations
with just one line only model L1 – One line can be used.
Tutorial: the rule applied for using the models is summarised
below:
• cconfiguration with board with pLAN address 2 Æ separate models
• configuration without board with pLAN address 2 Æ one model only
Important: the BMS serial port should only be used for monitoring
the variables, while to update the software use the RS485 serial
port dedicated to the pLAN connection.
A connection example for using PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO is
shown in the figure.
The following figure shows an example of connection to the PC via the
RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
pGD1 user interface
Field-Bus
BMS
CVSTDUTLF0
CVSTDUMOR0
pGD1 user interface
Fig. 9.a
Field-Bus
BMS
The complete list of supervisor variables, with the corresponding
addresses and descriptions, can be supplied upon request.
Power
supply
Fig. 9.b
Note: for further details see the pRack Manager program online
help.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
94
ENG
10. SOFTWARE UPDATE AND CONFIGURATION
Meanings of Buttons/Symbols
10.1 Smart Key: operating instructions
start
start +
start
start
mode
mode
start +
start +
mode
Flashing: The key is connecting to the pRack. During this phase,
which may last a few seconds, the start button is disabled.
Flashing: The key has detected the pRack and is checking the
access rights.
On steady: Pressing the start button will start writing the
software to the pRack.
On steady: Pressing the start button will start reading the
software from the pRack.
On steady: Pressing the start button will start reading the logs
from the pRack.
On steady: In case of C, pressing the button for 1 second
switches from read to write.
Tab. 10.b
If the key is type C, pressing the “mode” button for 1 second switches
from read to write. The symbols
(write to pRack),
(read from pRack),
(read logs) reflect the selected status. If the key is not type “C”, the
“mode” button is disabled and off. The “start” button starts the read or
write operation, indicated by the flashing of the corresponding symbol (
or
) at a frequency proportional to the progress of the operation.
When the operation is completed, the buzzer will sound intermittently
for 2 seconds. Pressing the “start” button again will make the buzzer
sound without repeating the operation. To repeat the operation, the key
must first be unplugged. In case of error the symbol will light up together
with the other LEDs. The following table can help you find the cause of
the problem.
Fig. 10.a
Programming the Smart Key via Personal Computer
The operating modes described in the table below can be configured
using a program on the PC. The program can also load the software to the
key or transfer logged data from the controller to disk.
Type Function
Mode button
Update software from key to pRack
Disabled
(BIOS, application, parameters, etc.)
Copy software from pRack to pRack Switches the key from write
C*
(BIOS, application, parameters, etc.) mode to read mode
B
Errors before pressing the START button
*: Default mode
+
Tab. 10.a
The key is factory-programmed in read/write mode (type C) so that it can
be used immediately to transfer software from one controller to another.
When the key is connected to the personal computer, the symbols have
the following meanings:
+
+mode
+mode
Symbols flashing Type of key is incompatible.
+
+
+
Flashing
Waiting for connection to PC
Alternating When connected to PC indicates data transfer in progress
+
Using the Smart Key with the pRack
Switch off the pRack, remove any peripherals connected in the pLAN
and plug the key into the telephone connector on the controller. When
switching on again, all the symbols light up momentarily and the buzzer
emits a beep. A few seconds later the key becomes operational. During
Symbols steady Password error
Symbols steady The key is missing one or more
required files (memory empty; no kit
for the type of pRack connected).
Symbols steady Incompatibility between the software
+start + flashing start on the key and the pRack HW.
Symbols steady Incompatibility between pRack
+mode + flashing mode application and HW (application size).
+
The programming key is compatible starting from BIOS version 3.43 and
BOOT version 3.01. For more detailed information on programming the
key, see the pRack Manager program manual.
Communication error: No response
Symbols flashing from the pRack or: Key firmware
version is incompatible.
Symbols steady No logged data present on the pRack.
Steady
Type of key not programmed.
Tab. 10.c
Errors after pressing the START button
will flash. The controller then enters
this period the symbols
programming mode and the start button lights up steadily. Press the
button to start data transfer.
+start+
+start+
Important: If the key is type B or C pressing the start button will
immediately delete the software already loaded on the pRack.
+start+
Important: Do not remove the key while data is being transferred
to the key itself, as the file being transferred will be lost and the
corresponding space will not be restored. To restore the original capacity
all the files will need to be deleted. If the key is type “C” , simply perform a
new application read operation.
+
+
+
Symbols flashing
and buzzer sounding Write operation failed.
+buzzer
intermittently
Symbols flashing
and buzzer sounding Read operation failed.
+buzzer
intermittently
Symbols flashing
Read logs operation
and buzzer sounding
failed.
+buzzer
intermittently
Incompatibility between
log configuration and
pRack HW (no dedicated
Symbols steady +
flash memory). This
flashing
error does not prevent
writing other files.
Insufficient space to
Steady
read logs.
Flashing
Generic error
Tab. 10.d
95
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
10.2 pRack Manager: operating instructions
10.2.1 IInstalling the application to update the software
pRack Manager is a program that lets you manage all the configuration,
debugging and maintenance operations on CAREL pRack devices. pRack
Manager can be installed by itself or as part of the 1Tool programming
environment.
Select the directory containing the application program files and click
“Upload” to upload the program to the pRack controller.
Installing pRack Manager
On http://ksa.carel.com, under the section "software & support/
Configuration & updating software/parametric controller software", select
pRack_manager. After having selected the most recent version of the tool,
click "download " and accept the general terms and conditions for the free
software user license; the program can then be installed on the computer.
Connecting the PC to the pRack
Connect a cable with USB/RS485 converter to the USB port on the
computer, and connect the converter to a telephone cable plugged
into the pLAN port of the pRack. Additional connection methods are
described in par. 6.5.
Fig. 10.e
10.2.2 Commissioning
Using the mouse, select “Commissioning” at the bottom left. A new work
environment will appear.
CVSTDUTLF0
Fig. 10.f
Click on “configura dispositivo” [configure device] to display all the
application variables. The variables can be selected according to the
categories that appear at the bottom.
J10
pR300T
FieldBus card
B M S card
POWER SUPPLY
Fig. 10.b
Upon launching, pRack_manager will display a screen showing the
connection settings in the upper right-hand corner. Choose:
1) “connessione locale” [local connection]
2) baud rate: Auto
3) “ricerca dispositivo” [find device]: Auto (pLAN)
As for the port number, follow the Wizard’s instructions for the port to be
identified automatically (e.g. COM4).
Fig. 10.g
10.2.3 Changing a parameter
Select the parameter category and then the parameter that you want
to edit. The parameter (e.g. recovery.recovery_type) will be highlighted
in blue.
Fig. 10.h
Fig. 10.c
1. Double-click on the column marked“letto”[read]. A window will appear
Switch the controller off and then on again and use the Connect
command to establish the connection. When the connection is
established the flashing message “ONLINE” will appear at the bottom left
of the screen.
in which you can enter the new value for the parameter.
Fig. 10.d
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Fig. 10.i
96
ENG
• <nomeApplicativo>.BIN [<ApplicationName>.BIN] (download reserved)
• <nomeApplicativo>.DEV [<ApplicationName>.DEV]
• <nomeApplicativo>.GRT [<ApplicationName>.GRT] (upload only, from
2. Enter the new value (e.g. 3) and click OK. The new value will appear in the
column marked “scritto” [written]. To write the parameter to the pRack
controller, right-click and select “scrivi selezionate” [write selected]. The
new value will appear in the column marked “scritto” [written], meaning
that the parameter has been written to the controller.
which the.GRP file is extracted)
• <nomeApplicativo>.IUP [<ApplicationName>.IUP]
• <nomeApplicativo>.LCT [<ApplicationName>.LCT]
• <nomeApplicativo>.PVT [<ApplicationName>.PVT]
• <nomepRacklog>.BIN, <nomepRacklog>.CSV, <nomepRacklog_
GRAPH>.CSV [<pRacklogName>.BIN, <pRacklogName>.CSV,
<pRacklog_GRAPHName>.CSV] (only if log files have been configured,
download only).
The files exchanged with the NAND memories of pRack controllers are:
• any file that the pRack can independently copy to the flash memory
(see above list);
• external files (e.g..pdf or.doc files for documentation).
10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions
Fig. 10.j
10.3.1 File extensions, names and contents
Click on “Salva” [Save] to generate the project’s “.2cw” file.
Various types of files can be uploaded and downloaded and are
distinguished by their extension.
10.2.4 Commissioning: basic concepts
File names
In order to be recognised, the names of the directories and files on the
pendrive must have no more than 8 characters; the controller makes no
distinction between upper-case and lower-case characters. However,
during DOWNLOAD the names of the directories created by the controller
on the pendrive are always in upper-case.
Note: The following paragraphs are from the online help of pRack
Manager, to which the user is referred for further details.
Commissioning is a configuring and real-time monitoring software that
can be used to supervise the performance of an application program
installed on a pRack, to start up the pRack and to perform debugging and
maintenance.
FILE TYPES FOR UPLOAD
File extension Description
.IUP
Contains the definitions of the screens on the terminal
.BLB
Contains the application
.BIN
Contains the application (with pLAN table)
.BLX
Contains the Logique of atoms custom in C language
.GRP
Contains the graphics
.DEV
Contains the preset configuration parameter values
PVT,.LCT
Contains the descriptions of the public variables to be
logged. Generated by 1Tool, this is used by the LogEditor
module and must be loaded together with the.LCT file
Operators using Commissioning for maintenance will be able to see the
necessary variables and to draw from preset configuration values.
10.2.5 Support files
Once the design of the application is completed, 1Tool generates a
number of files in the compiling stage, two of which are required by
Commissioning:
• <nomeApplicativo>.2CF [<ApplicationName>.2CF] (variable descriptor)
• <nomeApplicativo>.2CD [<ApplicationName>.2CD] (category and
access profile descriptor)
Downloaded files are saved in directories created automatically, with the
following name format:
NAMXY_WZ
Where:
NAM: identifies the type of data downloaded (LOG for logs, BKP for the
application, DEV for the buffer memory, CPY for all the data from the
controller).
XY: progressive number from 0 to 99
WZ: controller pLAN address.
In addition to these files, the software also manages the <nome
applicativo>.DEV [<Application Name>.DEV] file, which contains the unit’s
preset parameters.
When the user has finished using Commissioning, whether for configuration
or monitoring purposes, the following files can be generated:
• <nomeApplicativo>.2CW [<ApplicationName>.2CW] (descriptor for
categories, access profiles, monitoring groups)
• <nomefileCommissioningLog>.CSV [<FilenameCommissioningLog>.
CSV] (file used for the commissioning log, containing data of the
variables logged during monitoring)
Example: a directory named LOG00_01 contains the log files (LOG)
downloaded from a device whose pLAN address is 1. Since the key
contained no directory of this type before download, it is indicated with 00.
Important: No more than 100 files of the same type can be
downloaded to the pendrive, as the directories created can only be
numbered with XY=00 to 99.
Therefore, to configure Commissioning the following files are required:.2CF,
2CD and, if necessary, the.DEV file, which can be imported or exported.
For monitoring purposes, in addition to the files above, it might also be
necessary to have the.2CW file, containing the definition of the work
environment. The commissioning log file is a simple output file.
FILE TYPES FOR DOWNLOAD (controller pLAN address = 1)
File extension
Directory name
Description
.DWL
LOG00_01
Logged data
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,. BKP00_01
Application
PVT
.DEV
DEV00_01
Non-volatile parameters
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,. CPY00_01
All data on the controller
PVT
10.2.6 pRack Load: basic concepts
pRackLoad is the module that manages:
• uploading to the flash memory (of the device or of the ProgKeyX key
installed on the pRack);
• uploading to the NAND memory of certain devices;
• downloading the log file,.DEV file and P memory (from the flash
memory);
• downloading files from the NAND memory, if present.
Tab. 10.e
The downloaded files to have fixed names. In particular, the application
file is called “ppl–pRack.dwl”, the BIOS file “bios–pRack.bin”, the files
containing the logs and related information are “logs.dwl”, “logs.lot” and
“logs.pvt”, respectively. Finally, the buffer memory is saved to the file on
the pendrive.
The files exchanged with the Flash memories of pRack controllers are:
• BOOT.BIN (download reserved, upload enabled from menu)
• BIOS.BIN (download reserved)
• <nomeApplicativo>.BLB [<ApplicationName>.BLB] (download reserved)
97
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
Menu access
The following are the steps for accessing the pendrive management
menu. Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to the master port.
After the description of the desired function, various options are available:
1. To copy the complete contents of the directory, simply write the name
of the directory (e.g. the entire contents of the CHILLER directory):
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
[DIR]
CHILLER
USB key
2.
To copy just 1 file in a directory, enter the file’s name (e.g. the CHILLER.DEV
file in the CHILLER directory).
B M S card
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
Fig. 10.k
[DIR]
2.
Press Alarm and Enter together for 3 seconds to enter the option menu.
Select FLASH/USB memory and press Enter to confirm.
CHILLER
CHILLER.DEV
4:45&.*/'03."5*0/
-0(%"5"
05)&3*/'03."5*0/
'-"4)64#.&.03:
To show a string on the display describing the operation being
performed, add the “[NAM]” instruction, followed by the string to display.
The following file will display the string:
“UPL CHILLER.DEV”
Fig. 10.l
[FUNCTION]
3.
Select USB pen drive and press Enter to confirm.
Upload non volatile memory
[DIR]
/"/%'-"4)'*-&4
64#1&/%3*7&
CHILLER
[NAM]
Fig. 10.m
UPL CHILLER.DEV
Important: Wait a few seconds after the pendrive has been
plugged in for it to be recognised by the controller. If the message “No
USB disk or PC connected” is displayed momentarily with the request to
connect a pendrive key or computer USB cable, wait a few seconds until
the recognition message is shown (“USB disk found”) and the following
screen appears.
4.
CHILLER.DEV
3. To select only some of the files in the same directory, list them after a
label. The following labels are allowed and must be entered in the
order shown in the table:
Select UPLOAD.
UPLOAD file labels
4ELECTFUNCTION
61-0"% PENP$0
%08/-0"% P$0PEN
Fig. 10.n
10.3.2 Upload
An application plus BIOS or buffer memory (parameters) can be uploaded
from the pendrive. The following modes are available: automatic, autorun
and manual. Automatic and autorun modes require using configuration files.
File type
No.
Label
File type
1
[BIO] (*)
file.bin
6
[PVT]
file.pvt
2
[IUP]
file.iup
7
[LCT]
file.lct
3
[BIN]
file.bin, blb
8
[OED]
file.oed
4
[DEV]
file.dev
9
[SGN]
file.sgn
5
[GRP]
file.grp
(*) BIO = BIOS file
Notes:
Configuration file structure
Configuration files must start with the string “[FUNCTION]” followed by a
string that identifies the function, as shown in the table.
Function
UPLOAD an application or a BIOS file plus an
application
UPLOAD non-volatile memory (.dev)
UPLOAD the entire contents of the pRack
No. Label
• to get the.bin file from the BIOS in the format available on http://ksa.
carel.com (.os file), unzip the.os file;
• the [IUP] label can be followed by one or more “.iup” files.
String
Upload application
Important:
Upload non volatile memory
Copy pRack upload
• the order in which the file names are entered is fundamental and must
not be changed;
• do not enter empty lines or spaces in the file (e.g. at the end of a line);
• each file after the last line of code must contain a “carriage return”
character (CR€ ), as shown in the following example.
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
98
ENG
Example: The following file will upload the BIOS and an application.
3.
At the end a message will ask the user to remove the pendrive.
[FUNCTION]€
61-0"%*/('*-&
1-&"4&8"*5
Upload application€
€
[DIR] €
NEW AHU €
Fig. 10.q
€
[NAM] €
10.3.4 Upload in autorun mode
BIOS+APPL+LOGSv58B36 €
Uploading in autorun mode is a special case of uploading in automatic
mode. Unlike automatic mode, the user must wait for a specific message
to appear on the display to start or disable the operation described in
the configuration file. To upload a file in autorun mode, a configuration
file must be created and named “autorun.txt”. Example of uploading
BIOS+application. The upload involves two steps: first the BIOS is updated
and then the application. The information is shown on the pRack’s builtin display and on the pGDE terminal, when both are featured.
€
bisn509.bin €
€
[IUP] €
AHU_EN.iup €
AHU_IT.iup €
Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to port A.
€
[BIN] €
AHU.blb €
USB key
€
[DEV] €
AHU.dev €
€
2.
After a few seconds, Autorun mode starts. Press Enter to confirm.
[GRP] €
AHU.grp €
"65036/.0%&
61-0"%"11-*"5*0/
1RESS&/5&3TOSTART
&4$TOEXITAUTORUN
€
[PVT] €
AHU.pvt €
Fig. 10.r
€
3.
The validity of the FW is checked and the BIOS is loaded.
[LCT] €
AHU.lct €
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
10.3.3 Automatic upload
To automatically upload the parameter memory using the first
configuration file shown in the preceding paragraph, access the system
menu as previously described and proceed as follows:
Fig. 10.s
4.
1.
Select automatic mode. A screen is shown describing the function of the
buttons. Press Enter to confirm.
The display flashes to indicate that after loading the new BIOS the
controller is being reset.
'8WBMJEBUJPO
1MFBTFXBJU
4ELECTUPLOADMODE
"650."5*$.0%&
."/6"-.0%&
Fig. 10.t
Fig. 10.o
2.
pGD
NO LINK
Confirm by selecting Prg. A screen is displayed requesting confirmation
to upload the non-volatile memory. Press Enter to confirm.
61-'*-&?%&7
Fig. 10.u
5.
The test phase starts.
"PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE
Fig. 10.p
Fig. 10.v
99
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
pGD
Important: As can be seen, when updating the BIOS and the
application, the pGDE terminal shows the message “NO LINK”, meaning
that no connection is established. Do not remove the terminal and wait
for the end of the update procedure, when the pGDE terminal replicates
the messages on the built-in display.
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.w
6.
Note: Autorun run is especially useful in those cases in which the
same operation needs to be performed on several controllers. For
example, to load different applications on controllers connected in a
pLAN network, only one autorun file needs to be created; this uploads
the various directories contained on the pendrive based on the address
of the controllers. The controller with address XY will only load the
directory called “nomedir_XY” [“DirName_XY”]. The pendrive then only
needs to be plugged into each controller to run the upload, confirming
from the shared terminal.
The controller warns that no application has been loaded.
"PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE
10.3.5 Manual upload
Fig. 10.x
To manually upload the contents of the pendrive the user must access
the management menu from the system screens, selecting UPLOAD and
then MANUAL. The files are selected by pressing ENTER when the cursor
is on the desired file name. A selected file is marked by the symbol “*” on
the left. Once the files have been selected (all in the same directory), press
PRG to start the upload. To display the contents of a directory press ENTER.
To go up one directory level press ESC. Once the upload has started, the
messages shown on the screen are the same as in automatic and autorun
mode.
pGD
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.y
7.
The application update then starts.
10.3.6 Download
As mentioned above, the DOWNLOAD operation can be managed in two
ways:
1. Manual mode: follow the steps described in the paragraph“Automatic
upload” and select manual operation. Then each file must be
selected and downloaded.
2. Autorun mode: prepare a file called“autorun.txt”, containing a string that
identifies the function to be performed.
6PLOADAPPL
1LEASEWAIT
Fig. 10.z
Function
String
DOWNLOAD the application
Download application
DOWNLOAD non-volatile memory Download non volatile memory (.dev)
DOWNLOAD the entire contents of Copy pRack download
the pRack
pGD
/0-*/,
The result is the creation of files with the required extensions, which will
be placed in the respective directories as described in the paragraph “File
names”. When the operation is completed, the display shows a message
with the name of the directory created.
Fig. 10.aa
8.
Remove the pendrive. The update is complete. Wait for the display to
stop flashing, indicating that the controller is being reset before
restarting.
[FUNCTION]
Download application
6QMPBEDPNQMFUF
3FNPWF64#LFZ
BOEXBJUSFTFU
The following screen will be displayed.
1. Press Enter to confirm.
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
Fig. 10.ab
pGD
Fig. 10.ad
/0-*/,
2.
Download completed.
0PERATIONCOMPLETE
%ATADOWNLOADED
TO#,1?
Fig. 10.ac
Fig. 10.ae
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
100
ENG
N e
Example: On the controller with address 1, the autorun file will create
a directory called BKP00_01 and copy the files APPL_PRack.DWL and
FILE_DEV.DEV to this directory.
G a
t m a
- - t e w
- - -
s k
. a y
. -
:
:
-
.
-
.
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
:
- p e
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Connecting to a computer
D N S
D N S
-
Connect the slave USB port on the controller to the USB port on the
computer where pRack Manager is installed.
USB connector
from computer
B M S card
1
1
-
:
:
-
B A C n e
t
B A C n e
t
I D
T y
-
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated by going to
the following screen and pressing ENTER.
Fig. 10.af
P C O W E B
U p d a t e
Important:
• do not install any type of converter between the computer and port B,
even if requested by the program’s guided procedure;
• pRack Manager manages compressed files (.GRT/.OS).
Once the connection is established, the following operations are available:
1. UPLOADING the application or BIOS+application.
2. DOWNLOADING the non-volatile memory.
3. Commissioning
4. Managing the NAND flash memory.
C O N F I G
E N A B L E
p C O W e b ?
N O
While the parameters are being updated, the following message is
displayed:
P C O W E B
P l e a s e
e n d
o f
Once the USB cable is removed, the port will become available again
after approximately 5 s.
C O N F
w a i t
u p d a
I G
E N A B L E
f o r
t e
At the end, the screen shows:
Important: If no connection is established with pRack Manager
after plugging in the USB cable, wait at least 1 minute before using the
USB ports again after removing the cable.
P
U
R
a
10.4 ConfiguringpCOWeb/pCOnetfromasystem
screen
C
p
e
p
O W E B
d a t e
b o o t
p l y
n
C
c
p
e
O N F
o m p
C O W
w
s
I G
E N A B L E
l e t e
e b
t o
e t t i n g
Configuring pCOnet
See par. 6.6 for information on how to access the BIOS system menu.
Starting from:
• BIOS release 5.16 BIOS, and from
• pCOWeb firmware version A1.5.0, and from
• pCOnet firmware version A485_A1.2.1
pCOWeb and pCOnet communication parameters can be configured.
The purpose is to configure the network (Ethernet for pCOWeb, RS485
for pCOnet) when the respective card is installed for the first time. The
remaining parameters (alarms, events, etc.) can be configured using the
usual tools, i.e. BACset or web interface (pCOWeb only). Configuration
can be done either when using the Modbus protocol or the CAREL
protocol, but only on the BMS1 serial port. The screens for configuring
pCOWeb and pCOnet can be opened by accessing the system screens
and selecting OTHER INFORMATION and then PCOWEB/NET Konfig. Then,
select “PCOWEB settings” to configure pCOWeb parameters or “PCONET
settings” to configure pCOnet parameters.
When you select “PCONET settings” the following screen will appear:
B A C n e
t
B A C n e
t
-
I D
b a
- -
:
- u d
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters.
The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective fields
using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/
DOWN buttons. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the parameters
available, as listed in the following screen:
B A C n e t
M A C :
M a x
M a s t e r s
M a x
F r a m e s :
:
-
-
-
-
-
Configuring pCOWeb
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated following
the procedure described for configuring pCOWeb.
When you select “PCOWEB settings” the following screen will appear:
D H C P :
I P
-
-
-
A D D R E S S
- - - . - - - .
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters.
If the fields are not populated with the current parameters, check the
firmware version of pCOWeb and the protocol used by the BMS serial
port. The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective
fields using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the
UP/DOWN buttons. If the DHCP option is set to ON, the IP address and
Netmask fields cannot be changed. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display
all the parameters available, as listed in the following screens:
101
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
ENG
11. APPENDIX
A.1.2
A.1 System configurations with more than
one pLAN board
If the system configuration involves the connection of more than one
board in a pLAN, the addresses must be set correctly before selecting a
configuration solution. pRack pR300T can use two user terminals (as well
as a built-in terminal) with addresses 31 and 32. The default user terminal
address is 32, so only if a second terminal is required must the address of
this be set to 31, as described below. The address of the terminal is also
required when having to set the address of the pRack pR300T boards,
when multiple boards are connected to the pLAN. After having correctly
connected and configured the pLAN network of pRack pR300T boards,
the system can be configured as described in paragraph 4.1.
A.1.1
Setting the pRack pR300T board address
The pLAN address of the pRack boards can be set from any pGD1 terminal,
using the following procedure:
1. set address 0 on the terminal (see the previous paragraph for details
on how to set this address);
2. power down the pRack pR300T board;
3. disconnect any pLAN connections to other boards from the pRack
pR300T board;
4. connect the terminal to the pRack pR300T board;
5. power up the pRack pR300T board, while pressing
&
on the
terminal together. After a few seconds the pRack pR300T board begins
the start-up sequence and the display shows a screen similar to the one
below:
####################
selftest
please wait
####################
Setting the terminal address
IThe pRack pR300T user terminal is supplied with the default address
32, allowing the terminal to be used without requiring any additional
operations; nonetheless, in order to use an additional terminal or
configure the pLAN address of the boards, it needs to be changed
according to the following procedure:
1. power the terminal via the telephone connector;
2. press the three buttons , &
together for at least 5 seconds; the
6. when this screen is displayed, wait 10 seconds and then release the
terminal will display a screen similar to the one below, with the cursor
flashing in the top left corner:
7. the pRack pR300T board interrupts the start-up sequence and shows
Fig. A.e
buttons;
a configuration screen, similar to the one below :
Display address
setting.........:32
pLAN address: 0
UP: increase
DOWN: decrease
ENTER: save & exit
I/O Board address:01
Fig. A.a
Fig. A.f
Then, modify the pLAN address using the & buttons on the terminal.
8. Confirm the address by pressing
: the pRack pR300T board
completes the start-up sequence and uses the set address.
3. press
once: the cursor will move to the “Display address setting” field;
4. select the desired value using & , and confirm by pressing
again; if the value selected is different from the value saved, the
following screen will be displayed and the new value will be saved to
the display’s permanent memory.
1. Displaying the pLAN address
• press briefly (no more than 5 seconds) button A to display the current
Display address
changed
controller pLAN address. The display is cleared 5 seconds after releasing the
button.
Fig. A.b
BMS
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
u2
U3
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
Important:
• if the settings are not made correctly, the text and the images on the
display will be displayed incorrectly and out of order.
• if during this operation the terminal detects inactivity of the pRack
board whose output is being displayed, the display is cleared and a
message similar to the one below is shown.
+Vterm
FieldBus card
Y2
Note: if the address field is set to 0, the “I/O Board address” field is no
longer displayed, as it has no meaning.
A
Fig. A.g
Setting the pLAN address
1. press button A for 5 seconds. The pLAN address will start flashing;
2. press repeatedly or press and hold the button until reaching the
desired address (e.g. 7); remove the screwdriver;
3. wait until the address starts flashing quickly. The address is now
saved but not yet active for the application program;
4. power down the controller;
5. power up the controller again. The address will now be activated.
Display address
changed
Fig. A.c
If the terminal detects inactivity of the entire pLAN network, that is, it does
not receive any messages from the network for 10 seconds consecutively,
it clears the display and shows the following message:
Fig. A.h
102
Y4
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Fig. A.d
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
BMS car
J4
J3
GND
U3
u2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
Y2
NO LINK
CAREL INDUSTRIES - Headquarters
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy)
Tel. (+39) 049.9716611 - Fax (+39) 049.9716600
e-mail: [email protected] - www.carel.com
pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.6 - 23.07.2020
Agenzia / Agency:
">